Home

modules in an S7-300

1. 1 1 o o L 7 Pt 9 e L 3 o wa 5 3 L L 23 a 0 4B q 6 Qt ee fa AT BU S D z O y N 5 5 of ate pi 1 7 M M z MIDA 5 o lel u AN a 2 a J J 9 oO gt 7 l oj 1 5 lo m ATY Q K 30 o o o a M o _ 24v D T E 1 1 5 31 o o o Q gt o 2 q 6 le J L 2 L 5 p o O o S z FA co 14 x 34 2 J TX z o ol Be aa pal 2 14 16 M M 36 P 3 E Ga a aul Z L __ E Ker 18 38 se O alt igre 19 aa 39 o M M Sai E M 20 _40 L Channel _ 1 Connection possibility for contact supply number summated current lt 8A for Ta lt 30 degrees C Status LEDs green Summated current 5A forTa lt 60 degrees C Figure 3 19 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 67 Digital Modul
2. L 1 o o o oj 0 0 fo 2 5 3 gt 23 oj 1 E PAETE gt a je ae q h A 24 oj 2 2 le o Y o ol 3 3 fo ae M EER a 6 26 oj 4 4 fe o a 6 oj 5 5 f aaa ees o 6 6 i __ 8 0 L __ By 9 29 SE en E ee 7 Ee ija Backplane bus i g o interface WV 32 o kad oR 12 Fy o4 _ ol 0 0 13 33 a 1 Tje 25 es bx M Y ees ee oj 2 2 e TOS Ss 22 93 8 ol 3 3 fo 16 36 ha G oo a ol 4 4 fo Ea 17 n Y ra ee oj 5 5 fo 18 38 D q oe ees Pae 3 6 6 fb 19 39 e a T o 7 7 fo _ 20 401M 2 2 24V 24V Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 32 x 24VDC S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 3 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses Input byte x Input byte x 2 Input byte x 1 Input by
3. 1j N O 2 o 0 O 42v Va 3 1 Dee Foe p q o 2 RIR a AO O 3 M Pes i A O 4 o J 5 m er alee ae f EENE d DERZ ya 9 a 7 N O L M Backplane bus ulN ol interface se o o S i TO 8 ol 2 D ENA E piace 3 qe i oe 18 _ _ ol 6 ee rs KAS M Q 4y 7 ol N M J Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 6 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 120 VAC S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 23 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 mm Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 225 g 7 88 oz Module Specific Data Number of input points 16 max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L1 be driven simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 60 C e Vertical installation up to 40 C Galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences between Minternal and the inputs
4. ry Teese eee aT SIEMENS LO i OOOCOCOOO i A ike y 40 5 k 52 gt L aos 35 5 a gt Figure C 24 SIMATIC TOP Connect 1 Tier RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail Figure C 25 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the standard rail 45 ie 73 gt rd A A eeee ell 6l 0 E A leg x e6eee _ 0 gI ie l N eN y y Figure C 25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail C 20 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings RS 485 Repeater on S7 300 Rail Figure C 26 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the S7 300 rail 45 Le 70 sf fi A eeee 8 6J 1 eee ti E 9 P BIE J g eeee I LI B VN C y Figure C 26 RS 485 Repeater on S7 300 Rail S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 21 EWA
5. 1 1iL o x o 0 26 3 dIE a M 5 el 1 TETS lee 24V d 2 Be oe y ead ik 5 Backplane bus D q J 3 interface EEA 10 1M o 6 11 OL4 lo K D dIE vt 13 o 4 gt o M 45 el 5 Srei 24V o 4 17 a d o 19 e 7 20 2M hd Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 13 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 48 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Dimensions WxHxD Weight 40 x 125 x 120mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in approx 190 g 6 65 oz Module Specific Data Number of output points Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L Total current of the outputs per group e horizontal installation up to 20 C 68 F up to 60 C 140 F e vertical installation up to 40 C 104 F Galvanic isolation e between channels and backplane bus e between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences between different circuits Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus e from load voltage L without load Module power losses 24 VDC max 6 A max 4 A max
6. Switch for input Yl status 6 0 6 2 Q 3 Q 7 S 5 6 6 Q 7 t 5 Switch for setting the Wi gaam oA function input Craxinput 4 S 0 Q 1 2 Q 3 S 4 S 5 Q 6 E 7 0 l Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 5 1 Front View of Simulator Module SM 374 IN OUT 16 Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of the simulator module SM 374 IN OUT 16 Dimensions and Weight Voltages Currents Potentials Dimensions 40 x 125 x 110 mm WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 29 in Weight approx 190 g 6 65 oz Current drawn from backplane max 80 mA bus Module power losses typ 0 35 W Module Specific Data Status Interrupts Diagnostics Simulation either of 16 input points 16 output points 8 input and output points Status display Yes green LED per channel Interrupts No Diagnostic functions No S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules 5 2 Dummy Module DM 370 Order No 6ES7 370 0AA01 0AA0 Characteristics The dummy module DM 370 reserves a slot for non configured digital modules and interface modules If you replace the dummy module by another S7 300 module the mechanical configuration and the address assignment of the overall configuration are retained Special Features The dummy module can be used a
7. 20 M Figure 4 26 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 98 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Dimensions and Weight Noise Suppression and Error Limits Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120 mm Crosstalk between outputs gt 40 dB WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x aot 4 68 in Operational limit in the total temperature range Weight approx 220 g 7 7 oz referred to output range Module Specific Data e Voltage output 05 e Current output 0 6 Number of outputs 2 P i 5 Basic error operational limit at Length of cable shielded max 200 m 218 yd 25 C referred to output range Voltages Currents Potentials e Voltage output 0 2 Rated load voltage L 24 VDC e Current output 0 3 e Reverse polarity protection Yes Temperature drift referred to 0 02 K output range Galvanic isolation E ied dosa inearity error referre 0 fo e between channels and Yes to output range backplane bus e between channels and load Yes Repeatability in steady state 0 05 voltage L at 25 C referred to output range Permiss potential difference pa SAS agg utput ripple range 0 to z 0 fo between S and Mana 3 VDC referred to output range Ucm e between Mana and the 75 VDC Status Interrupts Diagnostics Minternal Uis
8. 4 M1 JG 1L 1 2 j 5 e 6 7 8 9 1M 10 2L 11 12 Ta r 15 hd 165 17 a 18 19 2M 20 4j Tm2 CYS COCCO OH Front lel102131 1102139 connector SOSOSOSS 6b OO Terminal block Figure 8 9 8 20 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Einleitung SIMATIC TOP connect TPA are components for wiring analog modules They offer an elegant alternative to the conventional way of wiring the actuators and sensors directly at the front connector Contents This description contains all information necessary to wire S7 300 analog modules with SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Additional information concerning the following topics can be found in Chapter 8 e Setting up an S7 300 with SIMATIC TOP connect e Wiring rules e Principles of wiring with spring loaded connections Application SIMATIC TOP connect TPA enables wiring of the following analog modules With SIMATIC TOP connect SIEMENS TPA QOOOOOOOCO Op co cn Qn oe O OG 2 E O lt Q Q Q Q LOD You Can Wire the Following Analog Modules SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit
9. Diagnostics SM 332 SM 332 Diagnostics Configur Message AO 2x12 Bit AO 4x12 Bit Effective for able External auxiliary Yes Yes Module No supply missing Configuring paramet Yes Yes er assignment error M short circuit Yes Yes Channel Yes Wire break Yes Yes S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 53 Analog Modules Error Causes and Remedies The following table shows for the analog output modules the possible error causes by which the diagnostics messages are triggered and the relevant remedies Please note that the analog output module must be parameterized accordingly so that the errors for which programmable diagnostics messages are output can be detected Table 4 24 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules and their Possible Error Causes and Remedies Diagnostics Message External load voltage missing Possible Error Cause Load voltage L of module missing Remedy Feed supply L Configuring parameter assignment error Illegal parameter transferred to module Reassign module parameter M short circuit Overload of output Eliminate overload Short circuit of output QV to Mana Eliminate short circuit Wire break Actuator resistance too high Use different type of actuator or connection e g use conductors with a larger cross sectional core area Open circuit between module and ac
10. 0 24 VDC 230V Voltage Selector On Off switch for Lee i 24 VDC Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor output voltage L 7 Terminals for 24 VDC N i m L J Strain relief assembly Figure 2 1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 2 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 3 Power Supply Modules Basic Circuit Diagram Figure 2 2 shows the basic circuit diagram of the PS 307 power supply module 2 A L1 L N M 24 VDC IO Figure 2 2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 2 A Line Protection We recommend that you install a miniature circuit breaker MCB for example Siemens 5SN1 series with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module 2 A e Rated current at 230 VAC 6 A e Tripping characteristic type B or C Reaction to Atypical Operating Conditions Table 2 1 gives information on the reaction of the power supply module to atypical operating conditions Table 2 1 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 2 A to Atypical Operating Conditions If Then 24 VDC LED the output circ
11. C Gl mI T A Bus module BM PS IM 7HA BM IM IM 7HD tax pi BM 2x 40 7HB BM 1 x80 7HC nw D Ly d E 92 a Figure C 11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 8 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings C 2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules PS 307 2A Figure C 12 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307 2 A power supply module Q 125 O EE 127 5 Figure C 12 Power Supply Module PS 307 2 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 9 Dimension Drawings PS 307 5A Figure C 13 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307 5 A power supply module 127 5 Le 80 J a 120 E aa A C AN S a Q e y 4 Figure C 13 Power Supply Module PS 307 5A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 10 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings PS 307 10A Figure C 14 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307 10 A power supply module 200 127 5 120 Q
12. 15 2000 j gt Figure C 4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail 160 mm Rail Figure C 5 shows the dimension drawing of the 160 mm rail A rn Al N Hie l M6 N o 10 po 8 H I1 io j C 10 i 140 p 6 Le 160 3 15 Figure C 5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings 482 6 mm Rail Figure C 6 shows the dimension drawing of the 482 6 mm rail wo g N Hie zaps N M6 nN D o 10 po S i s i X l 8 3 la 466 i 6 la 482 6 A 15 Figure C 6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482 6 mm Standard Width 530 mm Rail Figure C 7 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm rail E 7 a O He N M6 nN JELA 10 H 1 1 I l 15 500 530 Figure C 7 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 5 Dimension Drawings 830 mm Rail Figure C 8 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm rail ry r
13. Mana Figure 4 8 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated Analog Input Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 31 Analog Modules Connecting Current Sensors as 2 Wire and 4 Wire Transducers The 2 wire transducer receives its short circuit proof power supply via the analog input This transducer then converts the measured variable into a current Four wire transducers have separate power supplies Two wire transducers must be isolated sensors Figure 4 9 shows you how to connect current sensors as 2 wire transducers to an isolated analog input module Sensor ix Fa for example pressure M gauge 2 wire trans M od P ducer M M ADU M _ Lo P 2 wire M gic Back plane bus trans PF ducer Mana Figure 4 9 Connecting 2 Wire Transducers to an Isolated Analog Input Module Figure 4 10 shows you how to connect current sensors as 4 wire transducers to an isolated analog input module Sensor L for example Z pressure M gauge M P M ae M ADC _ __ Lo P 3 M gic Backplane bus o 45 m Figure 4 10 Connecting 4 Wire Transducers to an Isolated Analog In
14. 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 7 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 RS 485 Repeater Block Diagram Figure 7 2 shows the block diagram of the RS 485 repeater e Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other e Bus segment 2 and the PG OP socket are galvanically isolated from each other e Signals are amplified between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 between PG OP socket and bus segment 2 Segment 1 Segment 2 r 1 Atle Is Logic lt A Bi gt B2 Ai g 7 A2 B1 l B2 Le twee SD La PG OP 5V 1M 5V 11M socket E T L 24 V aM Ly oY L 24 V M l i M A1 B1 i PE 5V M 5 2 M5 V Figure 7 2 Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 7 7 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect Introduction SIMATIC TOP connect is the name of components used for wiring digital modules This type of wiring is an elegant alternative to the conventional way of wiring the actuators and sensors directly at the front connec
15. Assignments of the Terminals O T2737 44 5 6 YF OOOOOOOCOO ts OOOOCOOCOO a Top tier 00000 Terminal 0 through 7 Inputs outputs x 0 to SIEMENS TP3 X 7 COOCCCCOCO Middle tier All terminals M potential Bottom tier All terminals L potential Terminal Block for 2A Modules Table 8 5 shows the terminal assignments of 2A modules Table 8 5 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules Front View of Terminal Block Assignments of the Terminals left Top tier Terminal 0 through 3 Outputs x 0 to x 3 Assignments of the Terminals right Top tier right Terminal 0 through 3 Outputs x 4 to x 7 Middle tier Terminal 0 through 3 M1 potential for x 0 to x 3 Middle tier right Terminal 0 through 3 M2 potential for x 4 to x 7 Bottom tier 2 terminals connection for M1 Bottom tier 2 terminals connection for M2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 7 SIMATIC TOP connect Terminal Block for 1 Conductor Connection Table 8 6 shows the terminal assignments of the terminal block for
16. 0 eO E 125 Z K Figure C 14 Power Supply Module PS 307 10 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 CA Dimension Drawings PS 307 5 A with CPUs 313 314 315 315 2 DP Figures C 15 and C 16 show the dimension drawings of the configuration of a power supply module PS 307 5 A with the CPUs 313 314 315 315 2 DP Observe the dimensions that result from the use of the power connector for wiring the PS 307 5 A with the CPU O I S EN N 5 C o o y 27 a 68 a gt Figure C 15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307 5 A with CPUs 313 314 315 315 2 DP Front View S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 12 Dimension Drawings PS 307 5 A with CPUs 313 314 315 315 2 DP Figure C 16 shows the dimension drawing of the power supply module PS 307 5A with the CPUs 313 31 4 315 315 2 DP in the side view 130 120 125 Figure C 16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307 5 A with CPUs 313 314 315 315
17. S N L M Ground bus on 29 Figure 4 13 Connecting Loads to a Non lsolated Analog Output Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 36 Analog Modules Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a 4 wire and a 2 wire circuit However not all analog output modules allow both types of connection 4 Wire Circuit A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the 4 wire circuit You must therefore connect the sensor leads S and S directly to the load The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load Interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S and the reference circuit of the analog circuit Mana However this potential difference should not exceed the permissible value If the permissible potential difference is exceeded the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired With a 2 wire circuit the S and S terminals can be left open However you will not achieve the accuracy of a 4 wire circuit Figure 4 14 shows you how to connect loads to a voltage output of an isolated analog output module over a 4 wire circuit Lh or M Qy Lo DAC S Backplane gic I R bus s L Mana CPU U
18. Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120mm Measuring principle Integrating 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 i in Integrations conversion time resolution per channel Weight approx 250 g e Programmable Yes 8 75 oz AS OLAR e Integration time in ms 2 5 162 3 20 100 Module Specific Data e Basic conversion time incl 3 17 22 102 Number of inputs 8 integr umens ee i Additional conversion time 4 1 1 1 e with resistance 4 for resistance measurement measurement in ms Length of cable shielded max 200 m 218 yd o g yd Additional conversion time 4q 10 10 10 max 50 m 54 5 yd at for wire break monitoring 80 mV and inms thermocouples or Additional conversion time 16 16 16 16 Voltages and Currents 4 for resistance Rated load voltage L 24 VDC measurement and Reverse polarity protection Yes wire break monitoring in ms Power supplies of the PENSA e Possible resolution in bits sign incl overrange PEN T Ja A max 62 mA unipolar measuring range 9 12 12 14 c anne S gacor cnanne bipolar measuring range 9 12 12 14 group sign sign sign sign e Short circuit proof Yes i e Constantcurr nt for typ 1 67 mA Noise suppression for 400 60 50 10 frequency f1 in Hz resistance type sensor POR Noise Suppression and Error Limits Galvanic isolation pp between channels and Yes Noise suppression for F n x ba
19. Group fault LED 1x YA SF red Figure 3 12 Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt Redundant Output Signals The output with series diode can be used for the redundant control of an actuator The redundant control can be triggered by two different modules without an external circuit Both signal modules must have the same reference potential M Note If the output with series diode is used external P connections cannot be detected 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 40 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Diagnostics Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120 mm Status display Green LED per channel WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Interrupts Weight approx 210 g Diagnostics interrupts Configurable Module Specific Data Diagnostics functions Configurable Number of output points 8 e Group fault display SF Red LED SF Length of cable e Channel fault display F Red LED F per e Unshielded max 600m 654 yd channel e Shielded max 1000m 1090 yd e Diagnostics information Possible readable Voltages Currents Potentials g Actuator Selection Data Rated load voltage L 24 VDC Output voltage e Reverse polarity protection Yes P 9 e at 1 signal Total current of the outputs Output without series diode min L 0 8 V without series diod
20. Absolute Encoder SSI None 13 bit 21 bit 25 bit None means the encoder input is disabled Code Type Gray Binary Transmission Rate 125 kHz 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz Monoflop Time 16 us 32 us 48 us 64 us Note that the transmission rate and monoflop time affect the accuracy and currency of the en coder values See the technical specifications of the manufac turer Standardization 02 to 12 Positions Enable Freeze Off 10 11 Off The encoder value cannot be frozen 10 11 You specify the digital input whose positive edge is to freeze the value at the respective encoder input 0 1 or 2 You can also freeze all the encoder values with one digital input 1 The monoflop time is the length of time between 2 SSI frames The parameterized monoflop time must be greater than the monoflop time of the absolute encoder see the technical specifications of the manufac turer You have to add the time 2 x 1 transmission rate to the specified values 2 Default setting for all 3 encoder inputs S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 5 13 Other Signal Modules 5 3 5 Data Handling The values of the encoders are stored in the data area as of the initial module address They can be read from there using the command L PED xyz Data Areas for the Encoder Values The inputs and outputs of the m
21. values in Section 4 1 2 Table 4 4 in the voltage measuring range 80 mV Type E NiCr CuNi Type J Fe CuNi Type K NiCr Ni Type L Fe CuNi Measuring Method Description Measuring Range Measuring Range Selected Type of Sensor Module Setting Voltage You will find the digitized analo 80 mV A values in Section 4 1 2 Tablest4 l 4 250 mV and 4 6 jn the voltage measuring 4 500 mV range 1000 mV 2 5V B 5V 1to5V 10 V Thermocouples You will find the See anal a Typ N NiCrSi NiSi A internal compensation values in Section 4 1 2 Table 4 4 TypeE NiCr CuNi thermovoltage in the voltage measuring Type J Fe CuNi measurement range 80 mV ype J Ie en Type K NiCr Ni Type L Fe CuNi Thermocouples You will find the digitized anal Er Type N NiCrSi NiSi A Measuring Ranges for Current Measurement Table 4 31 lists all of the measuring ranges for current measurement with 2 wire and 4 wire transducers as well as the relevant measuring range module settings Table 4 31 Measuring Ranges for 2 Wire and 4 Wire Transducers Measuring Method Description Measuring Range Measuring Range Selected Module Setting 2 wire transducers You will find the digitized analog 4 to 20 mA D values in Section 4 1 2 Table 4 6 in the current measuring range 4 wire transducers You will find the digitized analo 3 2 mA C values in Section 4 1 2 Table 4 5 4 10 mA and 4 6 in th
22. to 4 15 under the temperature compensation range Type J Fe CuNi temperature Type K NiCr Ni measurement Type L Fe CuNi Thermocouples The digitized analog values are Type N NiCrSi NiSi A linearization external re in Section 41 2 Tables Type E NiCr CuNi compensation pE unger k Type J Fe CuNi temperature Type K NiCr Ni measurement Type L Fe CuNi Resistance type Pt 100 A standard range climate range Ni 100 standard range climate range S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 89 Analog Modules 4 7 Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit In this Section 4 7 1 In this section you will find e The characteristic features of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit e The technical specifications of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit You will learn e How to start up the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit e Which output ranges you can use with the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit e The parameters with which you can influence the characteristic features of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit Order No 6ES7 332 5HD01 0ABO Characteristic Features 4 90 The analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit has the following characteristic features e 4 outputs in 4 channel g
23. Configuring Interrupts Use STEP 7 to configure the interrupts Default Setting The default setting for interrupts is disabled Diagnostics Interrupt If an error for example short circuit to M is detected or eliminated the digital module triggers a diagnostics interrupt provided the diagnostics interrupt is enabled The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostics alarm block OB 82 Impact of the Power Supply and the Operating State 3 46 The input values on the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt depend on the power supply of the digital module and the operating state of the CPU Table 3 12 provides you with an overview of these relationships Table 3 12 Dependence of the Input Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Power Supply L of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt CPU Operating State Power Supply L Output Value to Digital Module of Digital Module POWERON RUN L exisis CPU value L missing 0 signal STOP L exists Substitute value last value 0 signal default L missing 0 signal POWER OFF ae L exists 0 signal L missing 0 signal A failure in the power supply to the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt is always indicated by the group fault LED on the front panel of the module and is also entered in the diagnostics log The initiation of a diagnostics interrupt
24. Overrange CPU value underrange Overflow 0 signal E Underflow 0 signal 4 58 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Influence of Faults Errors In the case of analog modules with diagnostics capability and the appropriate parameter assignment see Section 4 3 4 Parameters of the Analog Modules faults errors can cause a diagnostic entry and a diagnostic interrupt Table and 4 21 in Section 4 3 5 list the possible faults errors The SF LED flashes also if external faults errors occur independent of the operating state of the CPU with POWER ON 4 4 Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit In this Section In this section you will find information on e The characteristics of the analog input module SM 331 Al8 x 12 Bit e The technical specifications of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit You will also learn e How to start up the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit e Which measuring ranges the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit has e Which parameters can be used to influence the characteristics of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 59 Analog Modules 4 4 1 Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input Module SM 331 AIl 8 x 12 Bit Order No
25. 0 0 0 3 2 4 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2A 0000s 3 2 5 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC 1TA 4 3 2 6 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 2A 3 2 7 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 32 x 20 VAC 1 0A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 A 7 amp oa 1 N vii Contents 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 Relay Output Modules 0000 eee eee Relay Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC REL Relay Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL Digital output Module SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5A Digital Input Output Modules 0 00 0c cece eee Digital Input Output Module SM 323 DI 16 D0 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A Digital Input Output Module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5A 4 Analog Modules 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 7 viii Analog Value Representation 0 0c cece eens Representation of Analog Input and Output Values Analog Value Representation of the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Inputs 0 c cece eee Analog Value Representation of the Output Ranges of the Analog
26. Connect the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module locating the compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples The following constraints apply e The parameters of a channel group have general validity for all channels of that group for example input voltage integrating time etc e External compensation with the compensating box connected to the COMP terminals of the module can only be implemented for one type of thermocouple That is you must use the same type of thermocouple for all channels that are connected to that compensating box Abbreviations and Mnemonics The abbreviations and mnemonics used in Figures 4 6 and 4 7 have the following meanings M M COMP COMP _ Mana M L 4 28 Measuring lead positive Measuring lead negative Compensating terminal positive Compensating terminal negative Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Choice of Thermocouple Connections Figures 4 6 and 4 7 show the various methods of connecting thermocouples with and without compensating boxes In addition to the following explanations the remarks in Section 4 2 1 about the connection of sensors to analog inputs apply In the following figures the required connecting leads between the M connect
27. Maximum distance between IM 361 and IM 361 is 10 m 32 8 ft Status and Fault LEDs The interface module IM 361 has the following status and fault LEDs LED Meaning Explanation SF Group error fault The LED flashes if e the connecting cable is missing e the series connected IM 361 is switched off e the CPU is in the POWER OFF state 5 VDC 5 VDC supply for the 87 300 backplane bus 6 4 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Interface Modules Front View Figure 6 2 shows the front view of the interface module IM 361 X1 OUT SIEMENS SF le Dce5V e eS 2 D os L M on L a M O oie g 0 X2 IN Figure 6 2 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 6 5 Interface Modules Technical Specifications The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 361 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WxHxD Weight 80 x 125 x 120 mm 3 12 x 4 88 x 4 68 in 505 g 17 68 oz Module Specific Data Cable length e Maximum length to next IM Current drawn 10 m 32 8 ft
28. S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 6 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Interface Modules Front View Figure 6 1 shows the front view of the interface module IM 360 X1 OUT SF o of o Jo jo jo o o o o o o o o o o o o oooo0o0o00000000 Front view Figure 6 1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 Technical Specifications The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 360 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions WxHxD Weight 40 x 125 x 120 mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in approx 250 g Module Specific Data Cable length e Maximum length to next IM Current drawn e from backplane bus Power loss Status and fault LEDs 10 m 32 8 ft 350 mA typ 2 W Yes S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 6 3 Interface Modules 6 2 Interface Module IM 361 Order No 6ES7 361 3CA01 0AA0 Characteristics The interface module IM 361 has the following characteristic features 24 VDC power supply Interface for racks 1 to 3 of the S7 300 Current output via the S7 300 backplane bus max 0 8 A Data transfer from the IM 360 to the IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361 via connecting cable 368 Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m 32 8 ft
29. The analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit carries out a wire break check only for current outputs Short Circuit Check The analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit carries out a short circuit check only for voltage outputs 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 102 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Substitute Values You can parameterize the SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows Output Substitute Values default 0 mA 0 V or Hold Last Value For the output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must set the substitute value E500 in order for the output to remain de energized see Tables 4 17 and 49 Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit Order No 6ES7 332 7ND00 0ABO Characteristic Features The analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit has the following characteristic features 4 outputs in 4 channel groups The individual output channels can be programmed as Voltage outputs Current outputs Resolution of 16 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostics interrupt Programmable substitute value output Galvanic isolation to CPU and analog output channel Galvanic isolation analog output channel to channel Galvanic isolation analog output and L M Galvanic isolation CPU and L M S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 103 Analog Modules Terminal Connection Diag
30. 4 000 3 9995 1 1852 lt 1 1852 Units Deci Hexa mal decimal 32767 7FFFy 32511 7EFFy 27649 6C01y 27648 6CO0y 20736 51004 0 OH 1 FFFFy 4864 EDOOy 32768 80004 Overflow Overrange Nominal range Underrange Underflow Range S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 7 Analog Modules Resistance Type Sensors Measuring Ranges Table 4 7 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for resistance type sensors with the measuring ranges 150 Q 300 Q and 600 Q Table 4 7 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Resistance Type Sensors Measuring Measuring Measuring Units ioe 3o00 oon Deck Hexa Range gt 176 383 gt 352 767 gt 705 534 32767 7FFFY Overflow 176 383 352 767 705 534 32511 7EFFy Overrange 150 005 300 011 600 022 27649 6CO1y 150 000 300 000 600 000 27648 6C004 112 500 225 000 450 000 20736 51004 Nominal range 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 OH negative values physically not possible FFFFy Underrange 4864 EDOO 32768 80004 Underflow 4 8 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Standard Temperature Range Pt 100 Table 4 8 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard temperature range of the P
31. 4 84 4 89 oe module SM 331 Al 8 4 65 4 69 ec ee thermometer connection 4 33 Resolution analog value 4 3 Response time RS 485 repeater application block diagram definition design dimension drawing galvanic isolation grounded operation 7 4 pin assignment of the PG OP socket 7 6 rules 7 2 technical specifications Rules for wiring SIMATIC TOP connect S Group diagnostics analog output module analog input module Sensor connecting isolated non isolated to analog inputs Sensor supply missing SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts Settling time SFC 55 WR_PARM SFC 56 WR_DPARM SFC 57 PARM_MOD Shield connecting element dimension drawing Short circuit to P SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt Short circuit check analog output module SM 332 AO 2 analog output module SM 332 AO 4 Sign analog value 4 3 Signal module dimension drawing C 17 parameter sets SIMATIC TOP connect application areas components connecting cables 8 15 connection notes dimension drawing rules for wiring 8 9 selection spring loaded connections terminal assignments See Terminal block wiring the front connector wiring the terminal block Simulator module Sinusoidal interference SM 321 DI 16 x 120VAC characteristics technical data terminal connection diagram S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA
32. AN indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product handling the product or to a particular part of the documentation Qualified Personnel Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission to ground and to tag circuits equipment and sys tems in accordance with established safety practices and standards Correct Usage Warning Note the following This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical descriptions and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported stored set up and installed cor rectly and operated and maintained as recommended Trademarks SIMATIC SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG Some of other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks the owner s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes Copyright Siemens AG 1998 All rights reserved The reproduction transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without exp
33. Spare Parts and Accessories for S7 300 Modules Table D 1 Accessories and Spare Parts continued S7 300 Parts SIMATIC TOP connect 3 tier with e Screw type connection e Spring loaded connection Order No 6ES7 924 0CA00 0AA0 6ES7 924 0CA00 0ABO Round sheath ribbon cable 16 pin e Unshielded 30 m 98 4 ft e Unshielded 60 m 196 8 ft e Shielded 30 m 98 4 ft e Shielded 60 m 196 8 ft 6ES7 923 0CD00 0AA0 6ES7 923 0CG00 0AA0 6ES7 923 0CD00 0BAO 6ES7 923 0CG00 0BA0 Plug in connectors 16 pin set of 8 insulation displacement connectors 6ES7 921 3BE10 0AA0 Shield connecting element 6ES7 390 5AA00 0AA0 Shield connection terminals for e 2 cables with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm each e 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8mm e 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7 390 5AB00 0AA0 6ES7 390 5BA00 0AA0 6ES7 390 5CA00 0AA0 Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7 974 0AA00 0AA0 Fuse set for 120 230 VAC digital output modules contains 10 fuses and 2 fuse holders 6ES7 973 1HDO0 0AA0 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD Introduction In this appendix we explain e what is meant by electrostatic sensitive devices e the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic sensi
34. Table 4 19 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter SM 331 Al2 x 12 Bit and SM 331 AI 8 x 12 Bit Para Scope Value Range Default Ta Setting Enable e Process interrupt when limit value is Vesino No Dynamic Module exceeded e Diagnostics interrupt Yes no No Trigger for process interrupt e Upper limit value 32511 to 32512 Dynamic Channel e Lower limit value 32512 to 32511 Diagnostics Ch e Group diagnostics Yes no No Static oe aan e With wire break Yes no No group check Measurement Channel e Interference 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 10 Hz 50 Hz Dynamic or channel frequency group suppression e Measurement type deactivated U U Voltage 4DMU Current 4 wire transducer 2DMU Current 2 wire transducer R 4L Resistance 4 wire connection RTD 4L Thermal resistance linear 4 wire connection Channel TC I Thermocouple internal comparison Dynamic or channel TC E Thermocouple external comparison group TC LI Thermocouple linear internal comparison TC LE Thermocouple linear external comparison e Measuring range For the settable measuring ranges of the 10 V input channels please refer to the individual module description S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 49 Analog Modules Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Table 4 20 summarizes the parameters of the analog output modules and shows which param
35. Vs a failure in the internal sensor supply causes a failure of the internal and or external sensor supply and or a blown fuse to be indicated instead of a regular sensor supply failure The initiation of a diagnostics interrupt depends on the parameters see Table 3 3 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 18 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 1 4 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC Source Input Order Number 6ES7 321 1BH5 AA0 Characteristics The SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC source input has the following salient features e 16 input points source input isolated in groups of 16 e 24 VDC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and 2 3 4 wire proximity switches BEROs S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 19 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 5 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC source input You will find the detailed technical specifications of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC source input on the following page 4 L o s O i 2 o A i a 1 PENSE E gt D q oj 2 Y A
36. max 2 Hz S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 65 Digital Modules 3 3 3 Digital output Module SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5A Order No 6ES7 322 1HF10 OAA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5 A has the following features e 8 outputs isolated in groups of 1 e Load current 24 V to 120 V DC 48 V to 230 V AC e Suitable for AC DC solenoid valves contactors motor starters fractional h p motors and indicator lights Note In the case of currents greater than 3 A a conductor cross section of 1 5 mm2 must be selected in order to minimize the additional heating of the module at the connector When the front panel connector with spring loaded terminals is implemented the connector with the order number 6ES7 392 1BM01 OAAO must be used 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 66 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 19 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5 A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5 A on the following pages
37. 0 signal Residual current Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of motor starter Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load e to increase power Actuation of a digital input Max switching frequency e Resistive loads e Inductive loads to IEC 947 5 1 AC 15 e Lamp loads min L1 8 5 V 1A 10mAto1A 10 mA to 0 5 A max 10 A with 2 half waves max 1 mA Non zero cross outputs max size 3 to NEMA max 25 W Possible only outputs of the same group Not possible Possible max 10 Hz max 0 5 Hz 1 Hz Status Interrupts Diagnostics Short circuit protection of output e Min current required for fuse to blow e Max response time Spare fuses e Wickmann e Schurter e Littlefuse Fuse holder e Wickmann 8 A fuse 250 V per group min 40 A max 300 ms 8 A fuse quick acting 19 194 8 A SP001 1013 217 008 19 653 Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions e Group fault display on the module fuse or no L1 N Green LED per channel None Red LED SF 3 52 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 2 6 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 2 A Order No 6ES7 322 1FF01 OAA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 2 A has the following salient features e 8 output points
38. 10 A You will find a detailed technical description of the module on the following pages LED for 24 VDC output voltage available a ee e 24 VDC Voltage selector 230V On Off switch for L I 24 VDC ula U 2 J Terminals for oLa 24VDC OMe 2 output H ot IN o M voltage aA L Ss j IM Strain relief assembly Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor Figure 2 5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 12 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules Basic Circuit Diagram Figure 2 6 shows the basic circuit diagram of the PS 307 power supply module 10 A L1 L N M 24 VDC 1 Figure 2 6 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A Line Protection We recommend that you install a miniature circuit breaker MCB for example Siemens 5SN1 series with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module 10 A e Rated current at 230 VAC 16 A e Tripping characteristic type B or C S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications E
39. 4 1 3 Analog Value Representation of the Output Ranges of the Analog Outputs Tables for Output Ranges Tables 4 17 and 4 18 show the analog output ranges of the analog output module Voltage Output Ranges Table 4 17 shows the representation of the voltage output ranges 0 to 10 V 1to5Vand 10V Table 4 17 Representation of the Analog Output Range of the Analog Output Modules Voltage Output Ranges Output Output Output Units Range Range Range A R Decimal Hexa ange Oto 10V 1to5V 10V d cimal 0 0 0 gt 32511 Overflow 11 7589 5 8794 11 7589 Overrange 10 0004 5 0002 10 0004 10 0000 5 0000 10 0000 27648 6C00y 1 0000 0 OH Nomial range 10 0004 3 Underrange 11 7589 lt 32512 lt 8100 Underflow S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 16 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Current Output Ranges Table 4 18 shows the representation of the current output ranges 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA and 20 mA Table 4 18 Representation of the Analog Output Range of the Analog Output Modules Current Output Ranges Output Output Output Units Range Mieren Miehen PONA Decimal Piee 0 0 0 gt 32511 gt 7EFFy Overflow 23 515 22 81 23 515 32511 7EFFy Overrange 20 0007 20 005 20 0007 27649 6CO1y 20 000 20 000 20 000 27648 6C00q 0 4 000 0 0 OH o 3 9995 _ 6912 E5004 Nominal range 0 6913 E4FFy 20 00
40. 4 3 sign 4 3 Analog value representation Analog to digital conversion Analog output module SM 332 AO 4 4 90 characteristics 4 current output default settings substitute values 4 96 output ranges parameter assignment 4 101 short circuit check start up technical specifications terminal connection roo a voltage output wire break check 4 95 Analog output channel diagnostics byte Analog input output module SM 334 addressing 4 113 characteristics diagnostics electrical design measuring method 4 113 output type parameters start up 4 113 technical specifications terminal connection diagram 4 110 oO oO Analog input module basic settings 4 49 common mode error configuring error diagnostics 4 49 diagnostics interrupt enable wire break 4 53 wire break check error causes limit value isolated limit interrupt enable load voltage missing measuring range overflow measuring range underflow measurement type measuring range measurement non isolated parameters parameter assignment error 4 52 group diagnostics 4 49 interference frequency suppression Analog input module SM 331 Al 8 terminal connection diagram channel groups characteristics current measurement 4 68 default setting wire break check measured value resolution measuring method 4 67 measuring range module 4 66 measuring ranges parameter assignment resistance me
41. 4 A Yes Yes 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC max 40 mA max 60 mA typ 6 8 W Output voltage e at 1 signal Output current e at 1 signal Rated value Permiss range e at 0 signal Residual current Load impedance range Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load e toincrease power Actuation of digital input Switching frequency e Resistive loads e Inductive loads to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 e Lamp loads Voltage induced on circuit interruption limited internally to Short circuit protection of output e Response threshold min L 0 8 V 2A 5 mA to 2 4 A max 0 5 mA 12 Q to 4 kQ max 10 W Possible only outputs of the same group Not possible Possible max 100 Hz max 0 5 Hz max 10 Hz typ L 48 V Yes electronic typ 3 A Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions Green LED per channel None None S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 49 Digital Modules 3 2 5 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC 1A Order No 6ES7 322 1EH01 0AA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC 1 A has the following salient features e 16 output points fused and isolated in groups of 8 e 1A output current e 120 VAC rated load voltage e Suitable for AC solenoid val
42. A aia ae Switch for address assignment X 2 g 3 4 Front view Rear view Figure 5 2 Front and Rear View of the Dummy Module DM 370 and Position of the Address Assignment Switch S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 5 5 Other Signal Modules Switch Position Table 5 1 shows the meaning of the switch positions on the rear of the dummy module DM 370 Table 5 1 Meaning of the Switch Positions of the Dummy Module DM 370 Switch Position NA Meaning Dummy module reserves the slot for an interface module NA No Address that is no address space reserved Use in an ET 200M Setup with Active Bus Modules Pull and Plug No m K Dummy module reserves the slot for a signal module A Address that is address space reserved Dummy module reserves the slot for a signal module If you use the dummy module for an empty slot you must configure the empty slot with 0 bytes input output addresses Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications for the dummy module DM 370 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 120 approx 180 g Voltages Currents Potentials Current drawn from back
43. Cycle Time of the Analog Output Module 0c eens Response Time of the Analog Output Channels 085 Markings for the Measuring Range Module 000e05 Easing a Measuring Range Module out of Analog Input Module SM 331 Alg X 12 Bit nc dtiecdetddd Mat naaie Midis Lee aaao Inserting a Measuring Range Module into Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 12 Bit Terier pdun Gh ese dd fae See Set hewn See ee eee os Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331 ALB XA2 BIE oreet eat aeee ee yrewgie i enna a e been aeons Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit a nn ananuna Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331 AlL2X12Bit eee ciei mereka time amie eE nent dt aa aae E on d E i Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 X12 Bib aicn a naro e EE E O E eas ate Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2X12 Bit eeue asa kaada adia gd Pale ed lee bee aes Block Diagram of Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4x 16 Bit Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit 6 ccc tees Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334 02005 Record 1 of the SM 334 parameters 0 0 eeenes Front View of Simulator Module SM 374 IN OUT 16 Front and Rear View of the Dummy Module DM 370 and Posit
44. Hold last value digital output module l IEC 1131 1 2 IM 360 dimension drawing C 14 interface module IM 361 interface module IM 365 dimension drawing C 16 interface module 6 6 Input delay digital input module Interface module dimension drawing 6 2 Interference pulse shaped sinusoidal Internal compensation 4 27 Interrupt IP 20 K Channel specific errors Compensation external internal Short circuit to L SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 43 Short circuit to M SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 43 3 45 L Conductors number 8 9 Conductors SIMATIC TOP connect length of insulation to be stripped 8 9 Connecting conductors tightening torque 8 9 Conductor cross sectional areas ed Hold last value SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 43 ea enable analog input module 4 49 Limit value analog input module A 7 Limit value interrupt enable analog input module A 7 Load voltage missing analog input module analog output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 45 Loads connection to analog outputs 4 34 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index 5 Index M short circuit analog output module Dimension drawing active bus module Measured value resolution 4 4 4 4 Measured value tables for analog inputs 4 4 Measurement anal
45. S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules Channel Diagnosis Diagnosis of the Encoder Inputs Byte Bit Meaning Explanation 4 Channel type The SM 338 is of the type SM POS INPUT 794 5 Length of the diag The length of the diagnostic information is 8 diagnostic bits per nostic information channel 6 Number of chan Number of subsequent channels of the same type 3 nels 7 0 Channel malfunc Channel 0 1 tion Channel 1 2 Channel 2 8 0 POS INPUT 0 indi POS INPUT configuration or parameterization error internal chan vidual error nel malfunction 1 POS INPUT encoder malfunction external channel malfunction Cause wire break of the encoder cable encoder cable not con nected encoder defective interference Effect diagnostic message Remedy Check the connected encoder 9 0 POS INPUT 1 indi See byte 8 1 vidual error 10 0 POS INPUT 2 indi See byte 8 1 vidual error 5 16 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules 5 3 7 Technical Specifications Dimensions W x Hx D mm Weight Rated load voltage L e Range e Reversed polarity protection Optical isolation Permissible potential difference Between input M terminal and centralized ground point of the CPU Encoder su
46. SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit SM 332 AO2 x 12 Bit SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 9 1 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components Table 9 1 lists the components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Table 9 1 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components for TPA Order Number Terminal block Quantity 1 Spring loaded 6ES7 terminals 924 0CC00 0ABO Screw type 6ES7 terminals 924 0CC00 0AA0 Quantity 10 Spring loaded 6ES7 terminals 924 0CC00 1AB0 Screw type 6ES7 terminals 924 0CC00 1AA0 Front connector Voltage supply via Spring loaded 6ES7 terminals 921 3AF00 0AAO Screw type 6ES7 terminals 921 3AG00 0AA0 8 connectors insulation displacement wiring method 6ES7 921 3BE10 0AA0 Shielding plate for terminal block quantity 4 6ES7 928 1BA00 0AAO Terminal element for 2 cables each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 6ES7 390 5AB00 0AA0O 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 6ES7 390 5BA00 0AA0 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm 6ES7 390 5CA00 0AA0O Round sheath ribbon cable shielded 8mm 30 m 6ES7 923 0CD00 0BAO 60 m 6ES7 923 0CG00 0BAO Crimping tool for 16 pin connector 6ES7 928 0AA00 0AA0 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 9 2 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA
47. Terminal Assignments On the TPA terminal block the terminals are identified by letters This simplifies the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to the terminals on the terminal block Figure 9 1 shows the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to those on the terminal block Terminal Terminal assignments for number on TPA terminal block module Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2 ro it A Y Y A 2 2 B 3 a3 om C 4 4 D 25 5 E a 6 6 F 5 7 7 G 5 8 8 H D gt 9 9 a 10 10 K K 11 1 A A 12 12 B Z 13 13 b dE 14 14 D gt 15 15 E 16 16 F F 17 G 18 18 H q 19 19 l m 20 20 Z Z Figure 9 1 Allocation of Terminals on Analog Module to Terminals on TPA S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 9 3 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Multiplier Terminal The lower row of terminals on the terminal block consists of 2 x 5 multiplier terminals see Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Multiplier Terminals for TPA Terminal Assignments Description Terminals and Y can be used for multiplying arbitrary potentials and signals TP 2ee9e e0000
48. You can find the relevant parameters in Appendix A or in Tables 4 19 and 4 20 The parameters set with STEP 7 in the CPU RUN mode can be transferred to the analog module using SFCs 56 and 57 see Reference Manual System and Standard Functions For the two parameter assignment alternatives we subdivide the parameters into e Static parameters and e Dynamic parameters The following table shows the characteristics of the static and dynamic parameters Parameter Settable with CPU Operating State Static Programming device STOP Dynamic Programming device STOP SFC 55 in the user program RUN S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 47 Analog Modules Programmable Characteristics You can program the characteristics of the analog modules by means of the following parameters in STEP 7 e For input channels Interrupt enable Limit value interrupt Diagnostics interrupt Measurement e For output channels Interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt Substitute values Output 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 48 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Table 4 19 summarizes the parameters of the analog input modules and shows which paremeters e are static or dynamic or e can be set for the modules as a whole or for one group of channels or one channel each
49. e rong i9 2D data o aah E N 2C clock P ije yo 2T clock _ _ 14 clock E 4 a a o 10 I are l ne oj q1 z KH o 16 Inpu s W 17 DC24V enc G E lik 18 DC24V enc o j 419 M encoder 20 M encoder Twisted pair lines S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 8 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules 5 3 2 How the SM 338 Works The SM 338 captures the signals of up to three connected encoders cyclically The principle is illustrated here using the example of an encoder input A 25 bit encoder may be connected to the input for example The following steps are relevant The encoder signals are read in y Gray binary converter can be deactivated e a 2 eee A eae e Ne ce eee aa a een te Ss Se A Parameterizable standardization The digital input 10 11 is set The values are frozen asyn lloy licaliposessinsTEP 7 The values are read and processed by the STEP 7 program chronously to the process The encoder value is stored at the input address the address offset on the SM 338 The values are frozen asynchronously to the process via 10 11 The registers in the output range of the SM 338 are released see Sectio S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 5 9 Other Sig
50. e 250 kHz 56 us 88us 104us e 500 kHz 28 us 44 us 52us e 1 MHz 14 us 22us 26us Monoflop time Update rate 16 us 32 us 48 us 64 us Evaluation of the frame every 450 us Age of the encoder values determined by the method of transmission and the processing Encoder with a monoflop time greater than 64 us cannot be used with the SM 338 You have to add the time 2 x 1 transmission rate to the specified values S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 5 17 Other Signal Modules 5 3 8 Configuration and Parameter Assignment Frame Identifier for the Configuration Frame Order Number 6ES7 Byte 0 Byte 1 338 4BC00 0ABO C2 8F Byte 2 Byte 4 00 05 Byte 5 CD Structure of Data Record 0 for the Parameter Assignment Frame The parameters of the SM 338 in data record 0 are shown below Byte 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Diagnostic Interrupt O No 1 Yes 7 0 Byte 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Encoder input 0 7 0 Byte 17 0 Kon a Code Type 0 Binary 1 Gray Transmission Rate 00 125 kHz 01 250 kHz 10 500 kHz 11 1 MHz Monoflop time 00 16 us 01 32 us 10 48 us 11 64 us 7 0 Byte 18 0 0 ed Standardization 0000 0 Positions to 1100 12 Positions Enable Freeze 0 Off 1 On Freeze Input 0 10 1 11 En
51. n activated channels te Settling time t4 New digitized output value is present to Output value transfered and converted t3 Specified output value reached Figure 4 18 Response Time of the Analog Output Channels 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 42 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 3 3 Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels Introduction You can set the measuring method and the measuring ranges for the analog input channels of the S7 300 analog modules in two different ways e Using a measuring range module on the analog module and STEP 7 see also the STEP 7 Documentation or e Using the wiring of the analog input channel Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on the module and is described in detail in the module section This section describes how you set the measuring method and the measuring range via a measuring range module Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges with Measuring Range Modules If an analog module has a measuring range module it is supplied with the measuring range module plugged in You may have to relocate the measuring range modules to change the measuring method and the measuring range Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the left hand side of the analog input module Before installing the analog input module theref
52. referred to output range e Voltage outputs e Current outputs Temperature drift referred to output range Linearity error referred to output range Repeatability in steady state at 25 C referred to output range Output ripple range 0 to 50 Khz referred to output range gt 100 dB max 0 12 typ 0 04 max 0 18 typ 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 001 K 10 ppm K 0 004 0 002 0 05 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 105 Analog Modules Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions System fault display on Programmable Programmable Red LED SF Short circuit current Current output Open circuit voltage Connection of actuators Voltage output 4 wire connection measuring leads Current output 2 wire connection module e Diagnostic information Possible readout Actuator Selection Data Output ranges nominal values e Voltage 10V Oto 10V 1to5V e Current 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Load impedance in the nominal output range e With voltage outputs min 1K Q capacitive load max 1u F e With current outputs max 500 Q inductive load max 1 mH Voltage output e Short circuit protection Yes 40 mA nominal max 18 V Possible Possible 4 106 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Mod
53. see Section 3 2 3 This section also includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies 7654321 0 0 Configuration parameter error Ground fault Short circuit to P Short circuit to M Wire break External load voltage missing Overtemperature Figure B 7 Diagnostics Byte for a Digital Output Channel S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings Introduction In this appendix you will find the dimension drawings for the most important components of an S7 300 The specifications in these dimension drawings are required for dimensioning the S7 300 configuration The dimensions of an S7 300 configuration must be taken into account when installing an S7 300 in cabinets switchgear rooms etc This appendix does not contain any dimension drawings of the CPUs of the S7 300 or M7 300 or of the IM 153 1 These dimension drawings are contained in the relevant manuals Contents In this appendix you will find the dimension drawings of the following S7 300 components In Section You will find On Page C1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails C 2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules C 3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules C 14 C 4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules C 17 C 5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories C 18 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Modul
54. 0 5A SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 2 A 6ES7 322 1BH81 0AA0 6ES7 322 1HF80 0AA0 6ES7 322 1BL80 0AA0 6ES7 322 1FF81 0AA0 6ES7 322 1BH01 0AA0 6ES7 322 1HF10 0AA0 6ES7 322 1BL00 0AA0 6ES7 322 1FF01 0AA0 SM 323 digital I O module DI8 DO8 x 24 VDC 0 5A 6ES7 323 1BH80 0AA0 6ES7 323 1BH00 0AAO SM 331 analog input module Al 2 x 12 Bit 6ES7 331 1KB81 0ABO 6ES7 331 1KB01 0ABO SM 332 analog output module AO 2 x 12 Bit 6ES7 332 5HB81 0ABO 6ES7 332 5HB01 0ABO SM 334 analog I O module Al4 AO 2 x 12 Bit 6ES7 334 0KE80 0ABO 6ES7 334 0KE00 0ABO FEPROM 64 KByte memory card FEPROM 32 kByte memory card FEPROM 16 kByte memory card 6ES7 951 OKF80 0AA0 6ES7 951 OKE80 0AA0 6ES7 951 0OKD80 0AA0 6ES7 951 0KF00 0AA0 6ES7 951 0KE00 0AA0 6ES7 951 0KD00 0AA0 Bus connector 6ES7 972 OBAx0 0XA0 6ES7 972 0BBx0 0XA0 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 1 13 General Technical Specifications Climatic environmental conditions The SIMATIC outdoor modules for extended environmental conditions may be used under the following climatic conditions Installation category According to IEC 721 3 3 Class 3K5 Environmental conditions Range of application Remarks Temperature Horizontal installation 25 C to 60 C Vertical installation 25 C to 40 C Relative humidity From 5 to 95 Occasional brief condensation
55. 0 6 0 8 0 7 4 82 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Noise Suppression and Error Limits continued Sensor Selection Data continued Basic error operational limit at 25 C or 77 F referred to input range e 80mV e 250 to 1000 mV e 2 5t010V e 3 2to20mA Temperature drift referred to input range Linearity error referred to input range Repeatability in steady state at 25 C or 77 F referred to input range Temperature drift referred to internal compensation E 0 6 E 0 4 E 0 6 0 5 t 0 05 t 0 05 E 1 t 0 005 K Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts e Limit interrupt e Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostics functions e System fault display on Programmable c Programmable Programmable Red LED SF hannel 0 module e Diagnostics information Possible Read out Sensor Selection Data Input ranges nominal values input resistance Voltage 80mV 0MQ 250 mV 10 MQ 500 mV 10 MQ 1000 mV 10 MQ 2 5 V 100kQ 5V 100kQ 1to5V 100kQ 10 V 100kQ e Current 3 2 mA 125Q 10 mA 252 20 mA N59 0to20mA nso 4to20mA nsQ e Resistance e Thermocouples e Resistance type thermometer Permissible input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Permissible input current for current input destructi
56. 00 cece eee eee Measuring Ranges for Current and Voltage cece cence Minimum Potential Overflow Underflow Threshold Limits Default Settings of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al2 x 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Module 005 Measuring Ranges for Voltage Measurement 0 000 ee ee Measuring Ranges for 2 Wire and 4 Wire Transducers S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 XV Contents 4 47 4 48 4 49 4 51 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 9 1 A 1 A 2 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 B 1 D 1 Xvi Measuring Ranges for Resistance Measurements Measuring Ranges for Temperature Measurement Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit Ranges for Current and Voltage Outputs 00000 c eee eee Analog Value Representation 0 eect eens Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for Measuring Ranges 10 kWand 01010 V cc aa coe ras erkene bens geeks ob evak borane ed Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for the Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 00 cece eee Representation of the analog output range from 0 to 10 V Codes for Interference Suppression 00 cece eee eee eee Codes for the Measuring Ranges of
57. 01 Analog Modules Abbreviations and Mnemonics The abbreviations and mnemonics used in Figures 4 12 to 4 15 have the following meanings Q Analog output current Qv Analog output voltage S Detector lead positive S Detector lead negative Mana Reference potential of analog circuit Ri Load actuator L Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage M Ground terminal Uliso Potential difference between Mana and M terminal of CPU Connecting Loads to a Current Output You must connect loads at a current output to Q and the reference point of the analog circuit Mana Figure 4 12 shows the principle of connecting loads to a current output of an isolated analog output module X L M QI Lo DAC Backplane gic bus RL Mana CPU Los Uiso EA OEt iS Mis Ground bus 1 Figure 4 12 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated Analog Output Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 35 Analog Modules Connecting Loads to a Current Output continued Figure 4 13 shows the principle of connecting loads to a current output of a non isolated analog output module K L M ILo DAC Backplane gic bus MANA CPU ct
58. 01 Dimension Drawings C 4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules Signal Module Figure C 20 shows the dimension drawing of the signal module A signal module might look slightly different than the example below The dimensions however are always the same 40 120 130 125 Figure C 20 Signal Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 17 Dimension Drawings C 5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories Shield Connecting Element Figure C 21 shows the dimension drawing of the shield connecting element in connection with two signal modules 12
59. 1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 3 Parameters Note Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Table A 2 contains all the parameters which you can set for digital output modules The comparison shows e which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and e which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 Table A 2 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameter Data Configurable with PND se SECS 2 Programming Device Group diagnostics 0 No Yes Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes Substitute value enable Yes Yes Hold last value Yes Yes Substitute value Yes Yes Before you can enable the diagnostics interrupt in record 1 in the user program you must first enable the diagnostics in record 0 with STEP 7 You should only activate one of the parameters substitute value output and hold last value at a time S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 A 5 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of Data Record 1 Figure A 2 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital output modules You activate a parameter by setting the
60. 1 conductor connection Table 8 6 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 1 Conductor Connection Front View of Terminal Block Assignment of the Terminals Top tier one Terminal 0 through 7 Inputs outputs x 0 to x 7 SIEMENS OOOOCOOO e 4 27 amp 38 F S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 8 8 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect 8 3 Rules for Wiring Wiring Rules for the Terminal Block and the Front Connector The following table tells you which rules you have to observe when wiring the terminal blocks and the front connectors power supply Rules for Terminal Block Front Connector SIMATIC TOP connect Spring loaded Screw type Connection for Connection Connection Potential Supply Up to 4 Up to 8 Terminals Terminals Conductor cross sectional areas Solid conductors No No No Stranded conductors e without end ferrules 0 25 to 1 5 mm2 0 25 to 0 25 to e with end ferrules 1 5 mm 0 75 mm 0 25 to 1 5 mm 0 25 to 0 25 to 1 5mm2 0 75 mm2 Number of conductors per 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1 5 mm sum in a common end connection ferrule Max diameter of 3 1mm 3 1mm 2 0mm conductor insulation Length of insulation to be stripped e without insulation 11 mm 6 mm collar _ e with insulati
61. 120 VAC 40A 0 3 mill e between the outputs 00 VAC 20A 0 5 mill Insulation tested with 1 0A 0 7 mill e between Minten and 500 V DC 0 5 A 1 5 mill the supply voltage of 8 0A 0 1 mill te relays 230 V AC 4 0 A 0 3 mill e between Minternal Or 1500 V AC i y supply voltage of the 2 0 A 0 5 mill relays and the outputs 1 0 A 0 7 mill e between the outputs 2000 V AC O 5A 1 5 mill Current drawn e from backplane bus max 40 mA e from supply voltage max 125 mA L Module power loss typ 4 2 W 3 68 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Actuator Selection Data continued Actuator Selection Data continued Switching capacity and service life of contacts e for inductive loads IEC 947 5 1 DC13 AC15 Voltage Current No of switching cycles typ 24V DC 2 0A 0 3 mill 1 0A 0 5 mill O 5A 1 mill 60 VDC 0 5A 0 5 mill 0 3 A 1 mill 48 VAC 3 0A 0 5 mill 1 5A 1 mill 60 V AC 3 0A 0 3 mill 1 5A 1 mill 120 VAC 3 0 A 0 2 mill 2 0 A 0 3 mill 1 0 A 0 7 mill 0 5A 2 mill 230 V AC 3 0 A 0 1 mill 2 0 A 0 3 mill 1 0 A 0 7 mill 0 5A 2 0 mill Aux contactors Size 0 30 mill 3TH28 Lamps 230 V AC 1000W 25000 1500W 10000 Energy saving lamps fluorescent lamps with 10x electronic balast 58W 25000 Fluorescent lamps 1x conventionally 58W 25000 compensated Fluorescent lamps 10x uncompensated 58W 25000 An external protection circuit th
62. 1EL00 0AA0 Characteristics The digital input module SM 321 DI 32 x 120 VAC has the following salient features e 32 input points isolated in groups of 8 e 120 VAC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and 2 3 wire AC proximity switches S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 28 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 8 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital input module SM 321 DI 32 x 120 VAC You will find detailed technical specifications of the SM 321 DI 32 x 120 VAC on the following page 1L 3L 2 4 p22 3 p23 44 p24 26 27 28 9 _29 10 30 _ 1N 3N R 2L 4L Backplane se eee e 13 _33 14 _34 4 N Noor wowNM 0 fel Tel Tel Tel Jel Je Te Je Tel Te lo N O On fF WO N O 16 _36 12 4 37 Block diagram 19 39 20 40 2N 4N el le Ie le Je Tel Tel Te Te lo N O O fF W MY O W a L NOAA OW YH O al ata i Channel number Status LEDs green el _ Terminal connecti
63. 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 3 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated Analog Input Module Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non lsolated Analog Input Module Connecting Non lsolated Sensors to an Isolated Analog Input Module Connecting Non lsolated Sensors to a Non lsolated Analog Input Module 2 00 cee nent ened Design of Thermocouples 00 000 cece eee eee eee Connection of Thermocouples with External Compensating Box to an Isolated Analog Input Module 0 cc cee eects Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an Isolated Analog Input Module 0 cette Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated Analog Input Module Connecting 2 Wire Transducers to an Isolated Analog Input Module Connecting 4 Wire Transducers to an Isolated Analog Input Module Connecting Resistance Type Thermometers to an Isolated Analog Input Module 0 0 cece Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated Analog Output Module ks sssr eriste cisien ranerne eee eee Connecting Loads to a Non lsolated Analog Output Module Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated Analog Output Module over a 4 Wire Circuit 0 0 ce eee ee Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non lsolated Analog Output Module over a 2 Wire Circuit 0 0 0 cece eee Cycle Time of the Analog Input Module 00 cee e eee eee
64. 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Spare Parts and Accessories for S7 300 D Modules Spare Parts Table D 1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for S7 300 programmable controllers Table D 1 Accessories and Spare Parts S7 300 Parts Bus connector Order No 6ES7 390 0AA00 0AA0 Power connector between power supply unit and CPU 6ES7 390 7BA00 0AA0 Labeling strip Qty 10 e for 8 16 channel modules e for 32 channel modules 6ES7 392 2XX00 0AA0 6ES7 392 2XX10 0AA0 Slot numbering label 6ES7 912 0AA00 0AA0 Front connector 20 pin e Screw type connection e Spring loaded connection 6ES7 392 1AJ00 OAAO 6ES7 392 1BJ00 0AA0 Front connector 40 pin e Screw type connection 6ES7 392 1AMO00 0AA0 Front connector for 2 flat ribbon terminals e Screw type connection e Spring loaded connection 6ES7 921 3AB00 0AA0 6ES7 921 3AA00 0AA0 Front connector for 4 flat ribbon terminals e Spring loaded connection 6ES7 921 3AA20 0AA0 SIMATIC TOP connect 1 tier with e Screw type connection e Spring loaded connection 6ES7 924 0AA00 0AA0 6ES7 924 0AA00 0ABO SIMATIC TOP connect 2 tier with e Screw type connection e Spring loaded connection 6ES7 924 0BB00 0AA0 6ES7 924 0BB00 0ABO 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 D 1
65. 99 98 27 96 95 p4 93 2 pl 20 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Sign The sign S of the analog value is always in bit number 15 O gt ae Resolutions of Less than 15 Bits If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 15 bits the analog value is entered left justified in the accumulator The lower order bit positions not used are padded with zeros 0 Table 4 2 contains a bit pattern to show you how to write zeros 0 into the unassigned bit positions for a resolution with fewer than 15 bits Table 4 2 Bit Pattern of a 15 Bit and a 12 Bit Analog Value Example Resolution Analog Value Numberofbis 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 bit analog value S 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 il 0 0 1 1 12 bit analog value S 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 o 0 1 1 1 o 0 0 0 8 bit analog value S 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 O0 O0 O 0 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 3 Analog Modules 4 1 2 Analog Value Representation of the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Inputs Introduction The tables in this chapter contain the digitized analog values for the various measuring ranges of the analog modules Table 4 3 shows you the binary representation of the analog values and the associated decimal and hexadecimal notation of the units of the analog values How
66. A Unused Output Channels To make sure that unused output channels of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit are dead you must deactivate them and leave them open Deactivate an output channel using the Output parameter block of STEP 7 see Section 4 3 4 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 101 Analog Modules 4 8 3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2x 12 Bit Analog Outputs You can use the outputs as e Voltage outputs e Current outputs You make the output settings channel group wise using STEP 7 Output Ranges Set the various output ranges for the voltage and or current outputs with STEP 7 Table 4 43 lists all the possible output ranges of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit Table 4 43 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit Selected Type of Output Description Output Range Voltage You will find the digital 1to5V analog values in 0to10V Section 4 1 3 in the voltage 10 V output range Current You will find the digital 0 to 20 mA analog values in 4 to 20 mA Section 4 1 3 in the current 20 mA output range Default Setting The default settings of the module are output type voltage and output range 10 V You can use this output type with this output range without changing the parameters of the SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit with STEP 7 Wire Break Check
67. Al 8 x 16 Bit 0 Starting Up the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8 x 16 Bit Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit 2 0 cee eee ene es Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2x12 Bit 0 cee eee Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit 0 0 cee nes Starting Up the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al2x12 Bit Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al2 X12 Bit 2 ccc eee EET EELEE Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit 0 0000 4 67 4 70 4 74 4 76 4 79 4 84 4 87 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Contents 4 7 1 Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit 4 90 4 7 2 Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit 4 94 4 7 3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit 4 95 4 8 Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit 2 0 2 eee 4 96 4 8 1 Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit 0 c eee eae 4 8 2 Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2x12 Bit 4 8 3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2x12 Bit 4 9 Analog O
68. Al2 x 12 Bit Al8 x 12Bit External auxiliary Yes Yes supply missing Configuring paramet Yes Yes er assignment error Common mode error Yes Yes Wire break Yes Yes Measuring range Yes Yes underflow Measuring range Yes Yes overflow Diagnostics Configur Effective for able Module No Channel Yes Wire Break Check Diagnosis of a wire break is only possible when the wire break check is activated You can activate the wire break check with the corresponding parameter Error Causes and Remedies The following table shows for the analog input modules the possible error causes by which the diagnostics messages are triggered and relevant remedies Please note that the analog input module must be parameterized accordingly so that the errors for which programmable diagnostics messages are output can be detected Table 4 22 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules Possible Error Causes Remedies Diagnostics Message External load voltage missing Possible Error Cause Load voltage L of module missing Remedy Feed supply L Configuring parameter assignment error Illegal parameters transferred to module Check measuring range module Reassign module parameter Common mode error Potential difference U m between the inputs M and reference potential of measuring circuit Mana too high Connect M with Mana 4 52 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers
69. Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit 4 6 Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit 4 7 Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit 4 8 Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit 4 96 4 9 Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit 4 103 4 10 Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit 4 109 4 11 Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 12 Bit 4 115 SATS MN Egle Controllers Module Specifications 41 Analog Modules 4 1 Analog Value Representation Analog Values In all S7 300 analog modules the analog value is represented in binary form in the same way This chapter describes the analog values for all the measuring and or output ranges you can use with your S7 300 analog modules 4 1 1 Representation of Analog Input and Output Values Converting Analog Values The CPU processes the analog values in binary form only Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal Analog Value Representation The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the same nominal range The analog values are represented as two s complement Table 4 1 shows how the analog values of the analog modules are represented Table 4 1 Analog Value Representation Resolution Analog Value Number of bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit weighting VZ 214 913 912 211 210
70. Block with Shielding Plate 00202 eeu Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Module Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostics Data 0 0 0 cece eee ee Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data 0 0 cece cece ees Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data 0 0 ccc cece ees Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input Channel of an SM 331 Analog Input Module 26 462 ee ecn obs eee e eee eee bed eae oe eevee bid Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Output Channel of an SM 332 Analog Output Module 0 00 teeta Diagnostics Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC eet Diagnostics Byte for a Digital Output Channel 0 005 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482 6 mm Standard Width Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Wid
71. CH2 Sp CH2 Pa Ra Z Mana MANA D 15 Ql3 QV3 16 S34 E 0 WF CH3 g _ CH3 3 18 kes Mana Mana o 20M M Figure 4 25 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 91 Analog Modules Dimensions and Weight Noise Suppression and Error Limits Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120mm Crosstalk between outputs gt 40 dB WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 ioe in Operational limit in the total temperature range Weight approx 220 g 7 7 oz referred to output range Module Specific Data e Voltage output 0 5 e Current output 0 6 Number of outputs 4 P Basic error operational limit at Length of cable shielded max 200 m 218 yd 25 C referred to output range Voltages Currents Potentials e Voltage output 0 2 Rated load voltage L 24 VDC e Current output 0 3 e Reverse polarity protection No Temperature drift referred to 0 02 K output range Galvanic isolation ii i ieisnee age inearity error referre 0 fo between channels and Yes to output range backplane bus e between channels and load Yes Repeatability in steady state 0 05 voltage L at 25 C referred to output range Permissible potential difference Output ripple range 0 to 50 kHz 0 05 between S and Mana referred to output range UCM 3 VDC e between Mana and the 75
72. Compatibility of S7 300 Modules Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an item of electrical equipment to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without having an adverse effect on that environment The S7 300 modules satisfy the requirements of EMC legislation of the European national market You will find below some information on the noise immunity of S7 300 modules and their RI specifications Pulse Shaped Interference 1 4 The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of S7 300 modules with regard to pulse shaped interference A prerequisite is that the 7 300 M7 300 ET 200M conforms to the specifications and guidelines for the electrical configuration Pulse Shaped Interference Tested With Corr to Severity Class Electrostatic discharge to IEC 801 2 8 kV 3 discharge in air DIN VDE 0843 Part 2 4kV 2 contact discharge Bursts fast transient bursts to 2 kV supply cable 3 IEC 801 4 VDE 0843 Part 4 2 kV signal cable Surges to IEC 801 5 DIN VDE 0839 Part 10 External protection circuit required see manual S7 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Chap Lightning Protection Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV supply cable 2 kV signal data cable 3 Symmetrical coupling 1 kV supply cable 1 kV signal data cable S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specif
73. Figure B 5 shows the bit assignment of the diagnostics byte for an analog output channel of the SM 332 analog output modules see Sections 4 7 and 4 8 Section 4 3 5 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies 76543210 0 0 Configuration parameter error Common mode error P short circuit M short circuit Wire break External load voltage missing Figure B 5 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Output Channel of an SM 332 Analog Output Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 B 5 Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Digital Input Channel Figure B 6 shows the bit assignment of the diagnostics byte for a digital input channel of the digital input module SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupt see Section 3 1 3 This section also includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies 7654321 0 ojo Configuration parameter error Ground fault P short circuit M short circuit Wire break Sensor supply missing Figure B 6 Diagnostics Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC Digital Output Channel B 6 Figure B 7 shows the bit assignment of the diagnostics byte for a digital output channel of the digital output module SM 322 DO 8 24VDC 0 5A with diagnostics alarm
74. JF ei 3 a D je M o 2 M Ho o E ret Oo 3 a a Son esee o 5 ar et ee ve 8 eo 66 cii o 2 p al 7 Jitoye tie V Vs E ae So M s 11 Vs e Vs ES i lO 0 TE 12 di ol 1 nee E Woe A o 2 EA A asis Ik ner o 3 mos GAS ames o 4 OS tsi e e Noe a 5 EDS ig APs P qla 6 x zo Wl J 7 2 5 Backplane bus M 20 M F interface 4v c Channel number Status LEDs green Sensor supplies V green Figure 3 3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Redundant Sensor Supply Figure 3 4 shows how sensors can be supplied via Vs from an additional power source e g from another module b 1 L Short circuit proof driver Vs K 2L Digital input O M module L to the sensors Figure 3 4 Terminal Connection Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 10 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Diagnostics continued Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 120 mm 1 56 4 88 x 4 68 in approx 200 g 7 oz Module Specific Data Diagnostics functions Configurable Number of input points Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded 16 max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltag
75. LED on the module and additionally entered in the diagnostics Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment see Section 4 3 4 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 57 Analog Modules Influence of the Value Range on the Input The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within the value range Table 4 26 shows this dependency for the analog input values Table 4 26 Behavior of the Analog Modules Depending on the Position of the Analog Input Value within the Value Range Process Value Input Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Lies Within Nominal range Process value Overrange Process underrange value Overflow 7FFFyY Flashes Entered Diagnostic interrupt Underflow 80004 Flashes Entered Diagnostic interrupt Beyond the Process Process interrupt programmed limit value 1 Depending on the parameter assignment Influence of the Value Range on the Output The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within the value range Table 4 27 shows this dependency for the analog output values Table 4 27 Behavior of the Analog Modules Depending on the Position of the Analog Output Value within the Value Range Process Value Output SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Lies Within Value Nominal range CPU value
76. M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Glossary 3 Glossary Parameters Dynamic In contrast to static parameters dynamic parameters of modules can be changed during running operation by calling an SFC in the user program for ex ample limit values of an analog signal input module Parameters Static In contrast to dynamic parameters static parameters of modules cannot be changed by means of the user program but only via STEP7 for example input delay of a digital signal input module PG Programming Device PLC Programmable Controller Programmable Controller Programmable controllers PLCs are electronic control devices whose functions are stored in the controller in the form of a program The configuration and wiring of a PLC therefore do not depend on the actual functions of the control Pro grammable controllers and computers have similar structures they consist of a CPU central processing unit with memory input output modules and an internal bus system The I O and programming language are tailored to the requirements of open loop control technology Programming Device Programming devices are principally personal computers that are industry stan dard compact and transportable They are characterized by a special hardware and software for SIMATIC programmable controllers Reference Ground Ground Reference Potential The potential on which the voltages of the va
77. Outputs 0 0 cece eee eee Connecting Sensors Transducers and Loads Actuators to Analog Modules 00 00 ccc eee eee eee Connecting Sensors Transducers to Analog Inputs Using Thermocouples 000 eee eee Connecting Voltage and Current Sensors and Resistance TypeThermometers 0 00 ccc e eee eens Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs 004 Fundamental Principles for the Use of Analog Modules Conversion and Cycle Time of the Analog Input Channels Conversion Cycle Setting and Response Times of the Analog Output Channels serae tained annua daca ea baad Mud es aan ein arenes Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Channels 0 0000 cece eee eee Parameters of the Analog Modules 0 cece eee ee eee eee Diagnostics of the Analog Modules 00 0c cece ee eee eee Analog Module Interrupts 0 cece Behavior of the Analog Modules 0000 cece eee eee e eee ee Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8x12 Bit cee eee Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit 0 eee Starting Up the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8 X T2 Bita cs 4cc0 ney oe wan ected itan Pao eee Pee Analog Input Module SM 331
78. Parallel connection of 2 outputs e between the channels Yes e for redundant actuation of a Inputs in groups of 8 load Possible only outputs Outputs in groups of 8 e to increase power of the same group Permiss potential differences Not possible between different circuits 75 VDC Actuation of a digital output Possible 60 VAC i VDC Max switching frequency Insulation 500 e for resistive load max 100 Hz Current drawn e for inductive load to IEC max 0 5 Hz e from backplane bus max 40 mA 947 5 1 DC 13 e from load voltage L max 20 mA e for lamp load max 10 Hz without load P by eu Voltage induced on circuit typ L 48 V Module power losses typ 3 5 W interruption limited internally to Status Interrupts Diagnostics Short circuit protection of output Yes electronic Status display Green LED per chan e Response threshold typ 1A Interrupts None 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 76 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Introduction The S7 300 system has a number of analog modules for connecting to sensors and or loads actuators Contents In this chapter we describe the basic principles of analog technology and the analog modules of the S7 300 Section Conients Page 4 1 Analog Value Representation 4 2 4 2 Connecting Sensors Transducers and Loads Actuators to Analog 4 18 Modules 4 3 Fundamental Principles for the Use of Analog Modules 4 4
79. Parameterizing Diagnostics Use STEP 7 to set the diagnostics parameters Diagnostics Evaluation For the purpose of diagnostics evaluation a distinction is made between programmable and non programmable diagnostics messages With the programmable diagnostics messages evaluation is made only if a diagnostics enable has been programmed in the group diagnostics parameter The non programmable diagnostics messages are always evaluated irrespective of the diagnostics enable setting Only evaluated diagnostics messages will activate the following functions e Group error LED on the analog module lights up e Diagnostics message is transferred to CPU e Diagnostics interrupt is triggered only if you have enabled the diagnostics interrupt by parameter See also Appendix B and the reference manual Systems and Standard Functions for diagnostics evaluation in the user program with SFC S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 51 Analog Modules Diagnostics of the Analog Input Modules Table 4 21 gives an overview of the diagnostic messages that you can program for the analog input modules Enabling is executed in the Diagnostics parameter block see Section 4 3 4 The diagnostic information is assigned to the individual channels or to the module as a whole Table 4 21 Diagnostic Message of the Analog Input Modules Diagnostics SM 331 SM 331 Message
80. Terminal block Components for 1 conductor connection spring loaded screw type Order number 6ES7 924 0AA00 0ABO 6ES7 924 0AA00 0AA0 for 1 conductor connection 10 items spring loaded screw type 6ES7 924 0AA00 1AB0 ES7 924 0AA00 1AA0 for 3 conductor initiators spring loaded screw type 6ES7 924 0CA00 0ABO 6ES7 924 0CA00 0AA0 for 3 conductor initiators 10 items spring loaded screw type 6ES7 924 0CA00 1AB0 6ES7 924 0CA00 1AA0 for 2A modules spring loaded screw type 6ES7 924 0BB00 0AB0 6ES7 924 0BB00 0AA0 for 2A modules 10 items spring loaded screw type 6ES7 924 0BB00 1AB0 6ES7 924 0BB00 1AA0 Front connector for 32 channel modules see Figure 8 2 Power supply via spring loaded 6ES7 921 3AA20 0AA0 for 16 channel modules Power supply via spring loaded screw type 6ES7 921 3AA00 0AA0 6ES7 921 3AB00 0AA0 for 16 channel 2A modules Power supply via spring loaded 6ES7 921 3AC00 0AA0 screw type 6ES7 921 3AD00 0AA0 Connector 8 items crimped 6ES7 921 3BE10 0AA0O Round sheath unshielded 30m 6ES7 923 0CD00 0AA0 ribbon cables 60 m 6ES7 923 0CG00 0AA0 shielded 30 m 6ES7 923 0CD00 0BA0 60 m 6ES7 923 0CG00 0BA0 Crimping tool for connectors 16 pin 6ES7 928 0AA00 0AA0 8 4 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP conn
81. VDC Status Interrupts Diagnostics Minternal Uiso 60 VAC Interrupts e Insulation tested with 600 VDC e Diagnostics interrupt Programmable Current drawn Diagnostics functions Programmable e from backplane bus max 60 mA e System fault display on Red LED SF e from load voltage L max 240 mA module without load e Diagnostics information Possible Power losses of the module typ 3 W Tagout Analog Value Generation Resolution incl overrange 10 V 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 1to5V 11 bits sign e Oto 10 V 0 to 20 mA 12 bits Conversion time per channel max 0 8 ms Setting time e for resistive load 0 1 ms e for capacitive load 3 3 ms e for inductive load 0 5 ms Injection of substitute values Yes programmable 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 92 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Actuator Selection Data Output ranges nominal values e Voltage 10V 0to10V 1to5V e Current 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Impedance in the nominal output range e with voltage outputs min 1k Q capacitive load max 1 uF e with current outputs max 500 Q atUcm lt 1V max 600 Q inductive load max 10 mH Voltage output e Short circuit protection Yes e Short circuit current max 25 mA Current output e Open circuit voltage max 18 V Destruction limit for voltages currents connected from outside e Voltage at outputs to Mana max 18 V con
82. a channel between channels and load Permissible potential difference e between inputs and Mana between Mana and Minternal 24 VDC Yes max 62 mA Yes typ 1 67 mA Yes Yes 2 5 VDC 75 VDC 60 VAC 600 VDC max 60 mA max 80 mA typ 1 3 W Measuring principle Integration conversion time resolution per channel e Programmable e Integration time in ms e Basic conversion time incl integr time in ms Additional conversion time for resistance measurement in ms Additional conversion time for wire break monitoring in ms or Integrating Yes 2 5 162 3 20 100 3 17 22 102 10 10 10 10 Additional conversion time 16 16 16 16 for resistance measurement and wire break monitoring in ms e Possible resolution in bits sign incl overrange Unipolar meas range Bipolar measuring range e Noise suppression for frequency f1 in Hz 9 12 12 14 9 12 12 144 sign sign sign sign 400 60 50 10 Noise Suppression and Error Limits Noise suppression for F n x f141 f1 interference frequency e Common mode noise Upp lt 2 5 V e Series mode noise peak value of noise lt nominal value of input range Crosstalk between inputs Operational limit over entire temperature range referred to input range e 80mV e 250 to 1000 mV e 2 5to10V e 3 2to20mA gt 70 dB gt 40 dB gt 50 dB 1
83. ces aoe 8 o Ti a Pty eet o T a o o o o 0 L_ o2 i o 1 03B j 4 ioe aor z o14 o 3 yg ee toe of 4 45 o 16 2 h 9 5 Backplane bus ae 0 a ze o 6 interface nae Saso be a x Ag 5 20 M_ 124 V Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 2 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 7 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 120 mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in approx 200 g 7 oz Module Specific Data Number of input points Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded 16 max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L e Reverse polarity protection Number of input points that can be driven simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 60 C e Vertical installation up to 40 C Galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus between the channels Permiss potential differences between different circuits Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus e from load voltage L Module power losses 24 VDC Yes Yes No 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC max 25 mA max 25 mA typ 3 5 W Input voltage e Rated value e for 1 signal e for 0 s
84. corresponding bit in byte 0 to 1 7 6 1 0O Bitno Byte 0 Hold last value Substitute value output Diagnostics interrupt enable 7 65 4 3 2 1 0 Channel number Byte 1 Substitute value low byte 151413121110 9 8 Channel number Byte 2 Substitute value high byte Byte 3 Irrelevant Figure A 2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameters Table A 3 contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input modules The comparison shows e which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and e which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 Table A 3 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Data Configurable with Po se SECSS a Programming Device Diagnostics Group diagnostics No Yes Diagnostics with wire break check No Yes Limit value interrupt enable Yes Yes Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes Interference frequency suppression Yes Yes Measurement type Yes Yes Measurement range 1 Yes Yes Upper li
85. corresponds to relative humidity RH class 2 to IEC 1131 2 Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to a height of 1000 to 2000 m Pollutant concentration Test to IEC 721 3 3 SO lt 0 5 ppm 10 ppm 4 days class 3C3 Relative humidity lt 60 HoS lt 0 1 ppm 1 ppm 4 days Relative humidity lt 60 Mechanical environmental conditions Installation category to IEC 721 3 3 class 3M4 Testing of mechanical conditions The table below provides information on the type and scope of the mechanical condition tests for SIMATIC outdoor modules Test for Test standard Remarks Vibration Vibration test to IEC 68 Part 2 6 Mode of vibration Frequency sweeps with a sweep sinusoidal rate of 1 octave minute 2 Hz lt f lt 9 Hz const amplitude 3 5 mm 10 Hz lt f lt 150 Hz const acceleration 1 g Period of vibration 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 perpendicular axes Shock Shock test to IEC 68 Part 2 27 Type of shock Semi sinusoidal Schock intensity 15 g peak value 11 ms duration Shock direction 3 shocks each in direction in each of the perpendicular axes 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 1 14 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules Introduction 2 Various power supply modules are available to supply your S7 300 programmable controller and the sensors actuactors with 24 VDC Power Supply Modu
86. current Switching capacity and service life of the contacts e Resistive load Voltage Current No of switching cyc typ 24 VDC 20A 07 mill 24 VDC 10A 416mil 24 VDC 05A 40mil 120 VDC 0 2A 16mil 48 VAC 2 0 A 1 6 mill 120 VAC 20A 04mill 120 VAC 1 0 A 1 2 mill 120 VAC 0 5A 50mil 230 VAC 20A 02 mil 230 VAC 10A ga mill 230 VAC O 5A 15 mill e Inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 DC13 AC15 Voltage Current No of switching cyc typ 24 VDC 2 0A 0 3 mill 24 VDC 1 0A 0 5 mill 24 VDC 0 5A 1 0 mill 60 VDC 0 5A 0 5 mill 120 VDC 0 2 A 0 5 mill 48 VAC 1 5A 1 mill 60 VAC 1 5A 1 mill 120 VAC 2 0A 0 2 mill 120 VAC 1 0A 0 7 mill 120 VAC 0 7A 1 mill 120 VAC 0 5A 2 0 mill 230 VAC 2 0 A 0 1 mill 230 VAC 1 0 A 0 2 mill 230 VAC 0 5A 1 mill Lamp load max 50 W You will achieve a longer service life with an external suppressor circuit 3 64 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Actuator Selection Data continued Contact circuit internal Parallel connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load e to increase power Actuation of a digital output Switching frequency e Mechanical e Resistive loads e Inductive loads to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 AC 15 e Lamp loads Varistor SIOV CU4032 K275 G Possible only outputs of the same group Not possible Possible max 10 Hz max 2 Hz max 0 5 Hz
87. diagnostics comprises the recognition evaluation and signalling of errors which occur within the programmable controller Examples of such errors include Program errors or module failures System errors can be indicated via LEDs or via the STEP 7 tool S7 Information System Function A system function SFC is a Function integrated in the operating system of the CPU which can be called in the STEP 7 user program if required 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Glossary 5 Glossary Total Current Sum of currents of all output channels of a digital output module Ungrounded Without galvanic connection to ground User Program With SIMATIC a difference is made between the Operating System of the CPU and user programs The latter are generated by means of the gt STEP 7 programming software in the possible programming languages Ladder Logic and Statement List and are stored in code blocks Data is stored in data blocks S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index A Accessories Actuators connection to analog outputs 4 34 Addressing analog input output module SM 334 4 113 Active bus module dimension drawing C 8 Ambient conditions mechanical 1 8 Analog input connecting sensor measuring ranges Analog input channel measuring method measuring range Analog input module diagn
88. extensive description of the evaluation principle for the diagnostics data of signal modules in the user program in addition to a description of the SFCs that can be used for this purpose Data Records 0 and 1 of the System Data The diagnostics data of a module can be up to 16 bytes long and are located in data records 0 and 1 of the system data area e Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data describing the current status of an S7 300 e Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostics data of an S7 300 that are also located in data record 0 and upto 12 bytes of module specific diagnostics data Configuration and Contents of Diagnostics Data The configuration and the contents of the individual bytes of the diagnostics data are described below The following general rule applies If an error occurs the corresponding bit is set to 4 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 B 1 Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 0 and 1 Figure B 1 shows the contents of bytes 0 and 1 of the diagnostics data 7654321 0 Byte 0 Module error Error internal Error external Channel error present External auxiliary voltage missing Front connector missing Parameters missing Incorrect parameter in the module 7654321 0 Byte 1 0 0 WV Module type see Ta
89. fused and isolated in groups of 4 e 2A output current e 120 230 VAC rated load voltage e Suitable for AC solenoid valves contactors motor starters fractional h p motors and lamps indicator lights S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 53 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 15 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the module SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 2 A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 2 A on the following page J SF tallied i srye D 2 N t 3 aj 0 5V M t fayz 2 1 oe BO gt 8 M RY F ol 2 i U o re 5 Backplane bus to 3 interface l T 9 9 gt o j Li o O 12 N 13 o 4 o 5 o ee 8 17 o 6 eee Sa z 19 o 7 0 o Channel number Status LEDs green Fault di
90. in groups of 8 e 1 0 A output current e 120 VAC rated load voltage e Blown fuse indicator for each group e Suitable for AC solenoid valves contactors motor starters fractional h p motors and indicator lights 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 56 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 16 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital output module SM 322 DO 32 x 120 VAC 1 0 A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 32 x 120 VAC 1 0 A on the following page 11 3L1 a 2 o ft it NOORWNDA OH fete me pOJ NDANROUN OQ i i o000000000 oo 00000000 gt gt 1 w CU A pal 12411 13 13 14 14 N 2 EN ii tf i i O pi ope 16 17 16 17 NOORONHAOH 19 00900000000 00900000000 ie X 2 314 1 kee Channel number Status LEDs green Terminal connection diagram ye SF Ay K L1 Backplane gt Bus y K Block diagram Figure 3 16 Termi
91. in locations protected against the weather The operating conditions exceed the requirements of IEC 1131 2 The S7 300 fulfills the operating conditions of class 3C3 according to DIN EN 60721 3 3 installation locations with high traffic density and in immediate proximity to industrial plants with chemical emissions Where Not to Use S7 300 Systems Unless the appropriate extra measures are taken S7 300 systems must not be used e inlocations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation e in hostile environments caused for instance by dust accumulation corrosive vapors or gases e ininstallations requiring special monitoring for example elevators electrical installations in particularly hazardous locations One of the extra measures you can take to widen the application of S7 300 systems for instance is to install them in cabinets S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 1 7 General Technical Specifications Climatic Conditions Ambient Mechanical Conditions 1 8 You can use S7 300s under the following climatic conditions Climatic Conditions Temperature Horizontal arrangement Vertical arrangement Range 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Remarks Relative atmospheric humidity 5 to 95 No condensation corresponds to a rel humidity stress level of 2 to IEC 131 2 Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795
92. loss Current output e per rack Status and fault LEDs 1 m 3 28 ft 100 mA typ 0 5 W max 1 2 A 0 8 A No 6 8 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 RS 485 Repeater r In this Chapter In this chapter you will find a detailed description of the RS 485 repeater Included in the description are e The purpose of the RS 485 repeater e The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters e The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals e Information about grounded and non grounded operation e Technical specifications and the block diagram Further Information You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the manuals Hardware and Installation in the Chapter Configuring of an MPI or PROFIBUS DP network Contents This chapter includes the following sections on the RS 485 repeater Section Conients Page 7 1 Application and Properties 7 2 7 2 Technical Specification 7 5 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 7 1 RS 485 Repeater 7 1 Order No Application and Properties 6ES7 972 0AA00 0XA0 What is an RS 485 Repeater The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus segments Application of the RS 485 Repeater Rules 7 2 You need an RS 485 repeater if e more than 32 nodes are connect
93. of sensor supply to M Eliminate short circuit External auxiliary power Power supply L to module Supply L missing missing Internal auxiliary power missing Power supply L to module Supply L missing Fuse in module defective Replace module Fuse blown Fuse in module defective Replace module Incorrect parameter on module Illegal parameter transferred to module Reconfigure module parameter Watchdog time out Temporary high electromagnetic interferences Eliminate interferences Module defective Replace module EPROM error Temporary high electromagnetic interferences Eliminate interferences and switch on off power supply of CPU Module defective Replace module RAM error Temporary high electromagnetic interferences Eliminate interferences and switch on off power supply of CPU Module defective Replace module Process interrupt lost Quick succession of process interrupts cannot be processed by CPU Change interrupt processing in CPU and reconfigure module parameters if required 3 16 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Interrupts The following interrupts exist with the SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts e Diagnostics interrupt e Process interrupt Configuring Interrupts Use STEP 7 to configure the interrupts
94. of the Digital Input Modules 2 0 0 0 cence A 3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules 00 0c eee A 5 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 0 cece eee eee A 7 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 0 0000 eee A 11 B Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Cc Dimension Drawings C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 Dimension Drawings of the Rails 000 c cece eee C 2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules C 9 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules 00 000e C 14 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules 00000 C 17 Dimension Drawings for Accessories 6 c eee ees C 18 D Spare Parts and Accessories for S7 300 Modules E Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD E 1 E 2 E 3 What is ESD anosa sshd wobec ee ee ee ati E 2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons ccc eee eters E 3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage E 4 F List of Abbreviations Glossary Index S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Contents Figures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 2 A Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Powe
95. on signal acquisition Diagnostics Parameters Use STEP 7 to set the diagnostics parameters Diagnostics Evaluation For the diagnostics evaluation a distinction has to be made between configurable and non configurable diagnostics messages In the event of the configurable diagnostics message Sensor supply missing the diagnostics message is output only if diagnostics evaluation has been enabled in parameter diagnostics sensor supply missing In the event of non configurable diagnostics messages the diagnostics messages are always output irrespective of the parameter settings Output of a diagnostics message triggers a diagnostics interrupt only if the diagnostics interrupt has been enabled in the relevant parameter Irrespective of the parameter configuration the group fault SF LED will light up if errors have been detected and the relevant Vs LED will be extinguished in case of a short circuit on the sensor supply The group fault SF LED also lights up in case of external errors short circuit of sensor supply independent of the operating status of the CPU if power is on 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 14 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Diagnostics of Digital Input Module Table 3 5 provides you with an overview of the diagnostics messages of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and d diagnostics parameters in STEP 7 see Table 3 3 ex nostics in
96. operation As a user you must stay within the limits of this value typical The typical value is reached under nominal conditions and an ambient temperature of 25 C Values may fall below or exceed the typical value due to component tolerances approx The approx value denotes a rounded value for example the weight of a module without attributes Values without attributes are rated values with no tolerances Additional Assistance Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about the products described in this manual If you have any questions or suggestions concerning this manual please fill in the form at the end of this manual and return it to the specified address Please feel free to enter your personal assessment of the manual in the form provided We offer a range of courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC S7 programmable controller Please contact your local training center or the central training center in Nuremberg D 90327 Germany Tel 49 911 895 3154 vi 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Contents Preface 1 General Technical Specifications 1 1 Standards and Approvals 00 cece eee 1 2 Electromagnetic Compatibility of S7 300 Modules 1 3 Transport and Storage Conditions for S7 300 Modules and Backup Batteries iis van eens weed soso nanu d Fade Rew eda o
97. output points with the same start addresses each e The function can be set using screwdriver Note Do not actuate the switch for setting the mode when the CPU is in the RUN mode e Status LED for simulating inputs and outputs What to Note when Assigning Parameters The SM 374 IN OUT 16 is not listed in the module catalog of STEP 7 That is STEP 7 does not recognize the order number of the simulator module This means that you must simulate the relevant operating mode of the simulator module when configuring the desired function e f you wish to use the SM 374 with 16 inputs enter the order number of a digital input module with 16 inputs Example 6ES7 321 1BH01 OAA00 e If you require an SM 374 with 16 outputs enter the order number of a digital output module with 16 outputs Example 6ES7 322 1BH01 OAA00 e f you wish to use the SM 374 with eight inputs and eight outputs enter the order number of a digital input module with eight inputs Example 6ES7 323 1BH00 0AA0 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules Front View Figure 5 1 shows you the front view of the simulator module SM 374 IN OUT without front door You will find the simulator module s detailed specifications under Figure 5 1
98. program STOP mode of the CPU Error Handling via OB When the operating system detects an error for example STEP 7 access error it calls the specific organization block error OB for this error where the further response of the CPU can be specified Functional Grounding Grounding whose only purpose is to ensure the intended function of the electrical equipment concerned Functional grounding short circuits any noise that might otherwise have a detrimental effect on the equipment Ground The conductive mass of the ground whose potential can be assumed to be zero at any point In the vicinity of ground electrodes the ground may have a potential other than zero The term reference ground is often used in this situation Ground verb To ground means connecting an electrically conductive part via a grounding sys tem to ground one or several electrically conductive parts that have good con tact with the soil Hardware Interrupt Interrupt triggering modules trigger a hardware interrupt in the case of a certain event in the process The hardware interrupt is signalled to the CPU In accor dance with the priority of this interrupt the corresponding Organization Block is then executed 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Glossary Interrupt The gt Operating System of the CPU has 10 different priority classes which control execution of the user progra
99. terminal block to a 35 mm standard rail in accordance with EN 50 022 2 Plug the connecting cable into the terminal block see Figure 8 6 7 Om tO Figure 8 6 Plugging the Connecting Cable into the Terminal Block 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 8 14 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect 8 7 Wiring Wiring Digital Modules with SIMATIC TOP Connect Three terminal blocks are available for wiring the SIMATIC S7 digital modules with SIMATIC TOP connect The following notes for connection must be observed for wiring The connection notes depend on the SIMATIC TOP connect components used Table 8 3 in Seciton 8 1 will help you with the selection of components Connection Notes Table 8 8 lists the connection notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with the terminal block for 1 conductor initiators Table 8 8 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP Connect for 1 Conductor Initiators Digital Modules Connection Notes DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A Power supply add Descr on jumper terminal ar hee e d scale required block not egal 2 g a t a rina for power in line with ony conna or ermina supply descr on terminal block SM block SM 321 DI 32 x24 VDC X SM 321 DI 16 x24 VDC X SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC X source input SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A X SM 322 D
100. the Analog Inputs Codes for the Output Ranges 00 0 eee eee Meaning of the Switch Positions of the Dummy Module DM 370 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment 0 cece eee ee Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater Order Number 6ES7 972 OAA00 OXA0 0 0 e eee Technical Specifications of the RS 485 Repeater Pin Assignment of the 9 Pin Sub D Connector PG OP Socket Components of SIMATIC TOP connect 0 c cece eens Assignment of the Round Sheath Ribbon Cable Terminals to the Address Bytes of the 32 Channel Modules 00 ceeeeeee Selection for SIMATIC TOP Connect Components 45 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 3 Conductor Initiators Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 1 Conductor Connection Wiring the Front Connector ccc cee eee Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP Connect for 1 Conductor Initiators Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP Connect for 3 Conductor Initiators Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP Connect for 2A Modules Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 0 00 cece eens Multiplier Terminals for TPA 1 0 ee eens Parameters of the Digital Input Modules 0 00 c eee eee Parameters of the Digital Output Modul
101. the ground M of the CPU or IM interface module Use a wire with a minimum cross section of 1 mm for this If there is no ground connection between Mana and M the module switches off Inputs are read with 7FFFy outputs return a value of 0 If the module is run without a ground connection for some time it may be destroyed Note also that the supply voltage for the CPU or IM interface module must not be connected incorrectly Reverse polarity causes the destruction of the module because Mana is subjected to an impermissibly high potential 24V S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Dimensions and Weight Interference Suppression Error Limits for the Inputs Cable length shielded Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120mm WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 285 g 9 98 oz Module Specific Data Number of inputs 4 Number of outputs 2 max 200 m 218 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Interference suppression forf n x f1 1 f1 interference frequency Common mode gt 60 dB interference Upp lt 1 V Crosstalk between the inputs gt 50 dB Operational limit in the total temperature range referred to the input range e Voltage input 0 9 e Current input 0 8 Basic error limit operational limit at 25 C or 77 F referred to the input range e Voltage input 0 7 e Current input 0 6 T
102. the information you need easy to find Is the text easy to understand Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements Oi COP Ne se Please rate the quality of the graphics tables Additional comments S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 To Siemens AG A amp D AS E 82 Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg From Your Name Your Title Company Name Street City Zip Code Country Phone Please check any industry that applies to you Automotive Chemical Electrical Machinery Food Instrument and Control Nonelectrical Machinery aru U G a aa Petrochemical Oodadgaddu da Pharmaceutical Plastic Pulp and Paper Textiles Transportation Other S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Remarks Form Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to Siemens Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 very good to 5 poor Do the contents meet your requirements Is the information you need easy to find Is the text easy to understand Does the level of technical deta
103. this time by the user program S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 59 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 17 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC REL You will find the detailed technical specifications of the SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC REL on the following page 1 ice y 2 of 0 LZ Y 3 d 4 o o pore ts o 2 ieee A a 3 YQ wa o 4 L SEASON Se 5 M o Te ali Backplane bus ES lhe interface 9 N a 7 oll k Q 1 o Www 2 ae HA e 24V o pas as UB hag T 2 ae a 3 ee ee Q o 4 e Yz Plea 5 ERE J 18 _ _ o 6 M Ka 9 N o 7 ov ae 20 M O L Channel number __ _ Status LEDs green Fault display red Figure 3 17 Module View and Block Diagram of Relay Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC REL 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 60 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and We
104. to 40 C 16 Total current of the outputs per group e Horizontal installation up to 20 C max 4 A up to 40 C max 3 A up to 60 C max 2 A e Vertical installation up to 40 C max 2 A Galvanic isolation between channels and Yes backplane bus between the channels Yes Inputs in groups of 16 Outputs in groups of 8 Permiss potential differences between different circuits 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested with 500 VDC Current drawn e from backplane bus max 55 mA e from load voltage L max 100 mA without load Module power losses typ 6 5 W Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostics functions None 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 72 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Sensor Selection Data Actuator Selection Data continued Input voltage Voltage induced on circuit typ L 48 V e Rated value 24 VDC interruption limited internally to eat 1 signal 13 to 30 V Short circuit protection of output Yes electronic e at 0 signal 3 to 5 V e Response threshold typ 1A Input current eat 1 signal typ 7 mA Input delay time e from 0 to 1 1 2 to 4 8 ms e from 1 to 0 1 2 to 4 8 ms Input characteristic to IEC 1131 type 1 Possible max 1 5 mA Connection of 2 wire BEROs e Permissible bias current Actuator Sele
105. 0 SIEMENS TPA QQOOOOOOO Q AB CORE GH IK Terminals that have the same letters are electrically Y a linked to one another except terminals and Z and Y YIKIKA AAA Z d Y torron an Load Voltage Supply 9 4 The front connector provides separate pins for load voltage L and M This allows you to connect the analog module s load voltage supply via the front connector The front connector and the terminal block may be up to 30 meters apart S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Connection Example Figure 9 2 shows a sample connection for the SM 321 analog input module SM 321 Al 8 x 12 Bit in resistance test mode Resistance test on module o SF Alla L 1 Mo CHO 2 Q_ Mo 3 D q S a Ico 4 S 3 dAl Ico 5 a saci Mis CH2 6 o Ci p dE Oll Ter 9 z CEGE Comp 10 Compl s 11 _Comp Mana 11 Bing ck Me CH4 12 BOL M 13 3 4 Ico 4 14 oA tee 15 a Pha wees Ms CH6 16 3 TERY M3 17 q 5 8 Io3 4 18 PO
106. 0 27648 9400 27649 93FFy Underrange 32512 8100 0 lt 32512 lt 8100y Underflow Output Ranges for the SM 334 The analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit has the output ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA In contrast to other analog modules however the analog input output module SM 334 has a lower resolution and no overranges Please observe this when reading Tables 4 17 and 4 18 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 2 Connecting Sensors Transducers and Loads Actuators to Analog Modules In this Chapter In this chapter you will find e Fundamentals on how to connect sensors and transducers e A description of thermocouples Design and principle of operation of thermocouples Use of compensating boxes e A description of how to connect up thermocouples to analog inputs e A description of how to connect up other sensors and transducers to analog inputs Connection of voltage sensors Connection of resistance thermometers Connection of current sensors Connection of other sensors and transducers e A description of how to connect up loads actuators to analog inputs S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 18 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 2 1 Connecting Sensors Transducers to Analog Inputs Introduction You can connect various types of
107. 0 e eee eee Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 00 ee eee Diagnostic Message of the Analog Input Modules Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules Possible Error Causes Remedies 0000 cece ee eens Diagnostics Message of the Analog Output Modules Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules and their Possible Error Causes and RemedieS 0 ccc cece teens Dependencies of the Analog Input Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L 0 eee eee eee Behavior of the Analog Modules Depending on the Position of the Analog Input Value within the Value Range 2 0e ee eee Behavior of the Analog Modules Depending on the Position of the Analog Output Value within the Value Range ce ee eae Assignment of the Channels of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8 x 12 Bit to Channel Groups 2 000 c eee eee Default Settings of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8 x 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Modules 5 Measuring Ranges for Voltage Measurement 00 ee eee Measuring Ranges for 2 Wire and 4 Wire Transducers Measuring Ranges for Resistance Measurements 0055 Measuring Ranges for Temperature Measurement Assignment of Channels of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8 x 16 Bit to Channel Groups
108. 0 t gt i i i i A i i T l o o i oO 2 lt l AN xen 5 i wy y 80 gt Figure C 21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings SIMATIC TOP Connect 3 Tier Figure C 22 shows the dimension drawing of the 3 tier SIMATIC TOP connect _ I Tp ecoece ga SIEMENS Lo OOOCCOOCO OTP ZZ P44 Sone OOOOCOOCOO E OCOOCOOCOO y 60 40 5 s gt pe l 35 5 a Figure C 22 SIMATIC TOP Connect 3 Tier SIMATIC TOP Connect 2 Tier Figure C 23 shows the dimension drawing of the 2 tier SIMATIC TOP connect Z L Tpccs ose gy SIEMENS LO OOCOCCOO o OCOCOCOCO 2 OO OO y 60 40 5 lt gt ll 35 5 _ Figure C 23 SIMATIC TOP Connect 2 Tier S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 19 Dimension Drawings SIMATIC TOP Connect 1 Tier Figure C 24 shows the dimension drawing of the 1 tier SIMATIC TOP connect
109. 0 075 mm 58 Hz lt F s 150 Hz constant acceleration 1g Duration of oscillation 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of 3 axes normal to each other Shock Shock test to IEC 68 Parts 2 27 Type of shock Semisinusoidal Severity of shock 15 g peak value 11 ms duration Direction 3 shocks each in direction in each of the 3 axes normal to each other S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 1 9 General Technical Specifications 1 5 Information on Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection Test Voltages The dieletric strength of the insulation was proven with the following test voltages to IEC 1131 Part 2 Circuits With Rated Voltage Ue to Other Test Voltage Circuits or to Ground OV lt U lt 50V 500 VDC 100 V lt Ue lt 300 V 2 Un 1000 VAC Example According to the above table the test voltage for 230 VAC is 1460 VAC Protection Class Protection class 1 to IEC 536 VDE 0106 Part 1 that is the protective grounding conductor must be connected to the rail Protection Against Ingress of Foreign Bodies and Water Degree of protection IP 20 to IEC 529 that is protection against contact with standard probes Also Protected against the ingress of foreign bodies with diameters of more than 12 5 mm No special protection against water 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Spe
110. 0 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules 5 3 3 Freeze Function The freeze function freezes the module s current encoder values A frozen encoder value is indicated by bit 31 being set output range The encoder value is retained until the freeze function is terminated The evaluation of the encoder values can thus be event dependent Prerequisite for Using the Freeze Function The freeze function must be enabled and linked to the I0 and or l1 digital inputs During parameterization you specify which 10 11 digital inputs freeze the encoder values With one digital input you can freeze one two or three encoder values Terminating the Freeze State The freeze state must be terminated separately for each encoder input When the user program acknowledges the transfer of the encoder value bit 31 is deleted and the encoder values are updated again You write the acknowledgment in the output address of the module with a set acknowledgment bit by directly accessing the SM 338 T PAB xyz Freezing is possible again as soon as you have deleted the acknowledgment bit in the module s output address S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 5 11 Other Signal Modules Example Accessing Encoder Values 5 12 You want to read and evaluate the value of the encoder at the encoder inputs The initial module address is 256 STL Explanation L PED 256 Th
111. 0 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 20 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Isolated Sensors The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential They can be operated free of potential Caused by local conditions or interferences potential differences Ucp static or dynamic can occur between the measuring lines M of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana In order to prevent the permissible value for Ucn from being exceeded when operating in areas with heavy EMC interference the following applies e for analog input modules SM 331 with order no 331 7K 00 Connect M with Mana e for analog input modules SM 331 with order no 331 7K 01 We recommend you to connect M with Mana Do not connect M to Mana when connecting 2 wire measuring transducers for current measurement and resistance type sensors You can operate the CPU as follows Analog input module CPU Isolated Non floating bridge between A andM or floating no bridge between A and M S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 21 Analog Modules Isolated Sensors continued Figure 4 1 shows the principle of connecting isolated sensors to an isolated analog input module Please observe that you must not make the connection from M to Mana when connecting 2 wire transducers for current measurement or resistance type sensors T
112. 0 to 20 mA Section 4 1 21 Table 4 5 and Table 4 6 in 20 mA the voltage measuring range 4to 20 mA 1 of the S7 300 Installation and Hardware manual S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 77 Analog Modules Overflow Underflow and Process Alarm Limits Overflow and Underflow diagnostic thresholds for some of the measuring ranges differ from those shown in Section 4 1 2 of the S7 300 Installation and Hardware Manual Numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases The process input value at which an underflow or overflow diagnostic will be reported depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and may vary between the minimum limits shown in Table 4 29 and 32511 7EFFy Process alarm limits should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential overflow or underflow threshold limits shown in Table 4 29 Table 4 36 Minimum Potential Overflow Underflow Threshold Limits Range Minimum Possible Minimum Possible Overflow Threshold Underflow Threshold 10V 11 368 V 11 369 V 31430 31433 7AC6y 85374 5V 5 684 V 5 684 V 31430 31430 7AC6H 853Ay 1to5V 5 684 V 0 296 V 32376 4864 7E78y EDOO O to 20 mA 22 737 MA 3 519 mA 31432 4864 7AC8H EDOO 4 to 20 mA 22 737 MA 1 185 mA 32378 4864 7E7Ay EDOO 20 mA 22 737 M
113. 00 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Measuring Ranges for Resistance Measurements Table 4 40 lists all of the measuring ranges for resistance measurements and the relevant measuring range module settings Table 4 40 Measuring Ranges for Resistance Measurements Measuring Method Selected Resistance 4 wire connection Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4 1 2 Table 47 under the resistance measuring range Measuring Range 150 Ohm 300 Ohm 600 Ohm Measuring Range Module Setting A Measuring Ranges for Temperature Measurement Table 4 41 lists the measuring ranges or the sensor type and the measuring range module settings for temperature measurement The characteristics are linearized e for Pt 100 according to DIN IEC 751 e for Ni 100 to DIN 43760 e for thermocouples to DIN 548 type L to DIN 43710 Table 4 41 Measuring Ranges for Temperature Measurement Measuring Method Description Measuring Range Measuring Range thermometer linearization 4 wire connection temperature You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4 1 2 Table 4 8 and under the temperature range Selected Type of Sensor Module Setting Thermocouples The digitized analog values are Type N NiCrSi NiSi A linearization internal listed in Section 4 1 2 ables 4 12 Type E NiCr CuNi
114. 05 1 Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts e Limit interrupt e Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostics functions e System fault display e Diagnostics information Programmable channels 0 and 2 Programmable Programmable Red LED SF read out Possible Sensor Selection Data Input ranges rated values input resistance e Voltage 80mV 0MQ 250 mV 10 MQ 500 mV 10MQ 1000 mV 10MQ 2 5 V 100kQ 5V 100kQ 1to5V 100kQ 10V 100kQ Input ranges rated values input resistance e Current e Resistance e Thermocouples e Resistance type thermometer Permissible input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Permissible input current for current input destruction limit Connection of sensors e for voltage measurement e for current measurement as 2 wire transducers as 4 wire transducers e for resistance 2 wire connection 3 wire connection 4 wire connection e Impedance of 2 wire transducer Characteristic linearization e for thermocouples e for resistance type thermometers Temperature compensation e Internal temperature compensation e External temperature compernsation with compensating box Continued 3 2 mA 125 Q 10 mA 1252 150 Q 10 MQ 300 Q 10 MQ 600 Q 10 MQ Type E N J 10 MQ K L Pt 100 10 MQ Ni 100 max 20 V continuously 75 V for max 1 s duty factor 1 20 40 mA Possible Possible Possi
115. 1 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of Data Record 1 Figure A 4 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog output modules You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to 1 7 6 0 Bit no Byte 0 Diagnostics interrupt enable 7 321 0 Byte 1 Behavior on CPU STOP Channel group 0 Channel group 1 0 Outputs Channel group 2 de energized Channel group 3 1 Hold last value 7 4 3 0 Byte 2 Output channel group 0 Byte 3 Output channel group 1 Byte 4 Output channel group 2 Byte 5 Output channel group 3 Be a Output range Output type see Table A 7 Byte 6 High byte Substitute value channel group 0 Byte 7 Low byte d Byte 8 High byte Substitute value channel group 1 Byte 9 Low byte d ies ON eke f Substitute value channel group 2 Byte 12 High byte gt Substitute value channel group 3 Byte 13 Low byte J Figure A 4 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A 12 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Notes on Substitute Values Please observe the following notes when you set substitute values for the analog outputs e For the output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must
116. 1 M Eii 2 q o 2 T Vz Z 4 Ai gt Le 5 3 gt a 7 m en 2 o 4 M T of o 5 L 2 sE ro os a 6 Backplane bus T o 5 of d interface 9 7 TEE 4 4 e lo N g 5V 4 Bo ol Li i AD si o 0 k E d a M PRE T ee T n Sk IG Tes E yolga Soane O 2 3 A acle M S r AAF 5 eras 8 IF 6 T 7 e 20 N o O Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 10 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A 3 36 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120mm WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 190 g 6 65 oz Module Specific Data Number of output points 16 Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L Total current of the outputs per group e horizontal installation up to 20 C 68 F up to 60 C 140 F e vertical installation up to 40 C 104 F Galvanic isolation e between channels and backplane bus between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences between different circuits e Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus e from L without loa
117. 1 Type R PtRh Pt 240011 external comparison Type S PtRh cu 2 0100 Thermocouples 2 1101 pede Cuni IEG RP linearization Type L Fe CuNi 2 0110 internal Type T Cu CuNi 2 0111 comparison Type K NiCr Ni 2 1000 Thermocouples 2 1110 Type U Cu Cu Ni 2 1001 linearization external comparison S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 5 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameters Table A 6 contains all the parameters which you can set for analog output modules The comparison shows e which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and e which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 Table A 6 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter Diagnostics group diagnostics Diagnostics interrupt enable Behavior on CPU STOP Output type Output range Substitute value Data Record No Configurable with SFC 55 ee Programming Device No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note Before you can enable the diagnostics interrupt in record 1 in the user program you must first enable the diagnostics in record 0 with STEP 7 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 0
118. 2 DP Side View S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings C 3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules IM 360 Figure C 17 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 360 40 120 125 T Figure C 17 Interface Module IM 360 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 14 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings IM 361 Figure C 18 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 361 80 120 125 JL Figure C 18 Interface Module IM 361 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 15 Dimension Drawings IM 365 Figure C 19 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 365 40 120 lt s ed gt r f A LO y e C 4 y 9 120 mag gt LO o Gee l y Figure C 19 Interface Module IM 365 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 16 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02
119. 2 01 4 75 Analog Modules 4 5 2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module SM 331 AIl 8 x 16 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods on the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit e Voltage measurement e Current measurement Use the STEP 7 tool on the analog input module to make the necessary settings See Section 4 3 4 of the S7 300 Installation and Hardware Manual for more information about these settings Measuring Ranges Table 4 35 lists the measuring ranges you can use with the analog input module Use STEP 7 to select the desired measuring ranges Common Mode Voltage The analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit can make measurements in the presence of AC or DC common mode voltage For AC common mode voltages at multiples of the filter frequency setting the rejection is accomplished by the integration period of the A D converter and by the common mode rejection of the input amplifiers For AC common mode voltages lt 35 VRMS the rejection ratio of gt 100 dB results in negligible measurement error For DC common mode voltages only the rejection of the input amplifier stage is available to minimize the effect of the common mode voltage Therefore some accuracy degradation occurs in proportion to the common mode voltage The worst case error occurs with 50 VDC between one channel and the other seven channels The calculated worst case error is 0 7 from 0 to 60 d
120. 22 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 63 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Diagnostics Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120 mm WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 190 g 6 65 oz Module Specific Data Number of output points 8 max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated supply voltage of the relay L Total current of the outputs per group Galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays between Minternal Or supply voltage of the relays and the outputs between the outputs of different groups Insulation tested with e between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays between Minternal Or supply voltage of the relays and the outputs between the outputs of different groups Current drawn e from backplane bus e from supply voltage L Module power losses 24 VDC max 4A Yes Yes 75 VDC 60 VAC 230 VAC 400 VAC 500 VDC 1500 VAC 1500 VAC max 40 mA max 110 mA typ 2 2W Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostics functions None Actuator Selection Data Thermic permanent max 3A
121. 23 A A Backplane bus 302M interface 31 3 5 i me ett ony 12 7X 32 Saar oj 0 0 fol o ik ji D 13 33 oj 1 1 fo E T 253 ee 15 35 oj 3 3 e aa Ons Pa TE 16 36 o 4 4 fo TS Oni Seo a 5 g 17 37 O o aiia D a gt eer ia Y nY ol 6 6 e ete lE Sed H are A Dee 19 39 o 7 7 fe H a Eis _4 1M 20 M 4013M o H 0 24V Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 71 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the input output addresses Inputs Input byte x Outputs Output byte x Input byte x 1 Output byte x 1 Dimensions and Weight Voltages Currents Potentials continued Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120 mm WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 260 g Module Specific Data Number of input points 16 Number of output points 16 Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded max 600m 654 yd max 1000m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L 24 VDC e Reverse polarity protection Yes for input supply No of inputs controllable simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 40 C 16 up to 60 C 8 e Vertical installation up
122. 24 VDC 0 5 A sends a 1 signal to its outputs for approximately 50 us You must observe this when using the digital output module SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A for high speed counters 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 70 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 20 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A on the following page 1L4 1 21 o o r Pe 2L 24V oj 0 0 fo i ot Z amp 22 T O 3 gt i i a esc ae D 4 H gt 24 oj 2 2 e o EN 5 Vv L 25 ol 3 3 e aa Maer M 4 Sine Se 6 26 oj 4 4 fo o AA a o a 5s i a gt a ia al 6 l 6 fe __ 8_ iL 4 a ae ol 7 7 fo TES Iof M be
123. 4 to 15 The diagnostic messages are generated even when you have not enabled diagnostics The module diagnosis is available after a diagnostic interrupt in the CPU interrupt OB OB 82 The channel diagnostic information must be read using the SFC 51 RDSYSST with SZL_ID W 16 B3 See the System and Standard Functions Reference Manual All the relevant bytes and bits are listed in the tables below The group error LED red comes on When there is a problem with a module At start up during the self test of the SM 338 for a short time Module Diagnosis Byte Bit Meaning Explanation 0 0 Module problem The bit is always set when a malfunction occurs 1 Internal malfunc An internal malfunction or internal channel malfunction has oc tion curred 2 External malfunc An external malfunction or external channel malfunction has oc tion curred 3 Channel malfunc An internal or external channel malfunction has occurred tion 4 External auxiliary Cause missing connection undervoltage ground wire break ly missi aot ci TMSSMY Effect diagnostic interrupt no cyclical capture encoder malfunc tion Remedy Ensure the 24V connection is correct 6 Module not para Parameterize the module meterized 7 Parameterization Check the parameterization error 1 Oto3 Module category SH 4 Channel informa This bit is always set tion 2 3 Watchdog Internal time monitoring is activated
124. 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index 7 Index SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC Sci cot technical data 3 8 Terminal connection diagram SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupt characteristics diagnostics interrupt process interrupt process interrupt lost redundant sensor supply 3 10 setting the parameters technical data 3 11 terminal connection diagram SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts auxiliary power missing 3 16 default setting diagnostics interrupt enable 3 13 diagnostics 3 15 EPROM error 3 16 error causes fuse blown input delay parameters parameters incorrect parameter assignment process interrupt lost process interrupt process interrupt enable 3 13 RAM error sensor supply missing watchdog SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC source input characteristics technical data terminal connection diagram SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts input delay 3 13 SM 321 DI 32 x 24VDC characteristics 3 2 technical data terminal connection diagram 3 3 SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230VAC characteristics technical data terminal connection diagram 3 26 SM 322 SM 322 DO 16 x 120VAC characteristics 3 5 technical data 3 5 terminal connection diagram 3 51 SM 322 DO 16 x 230VAC REL characteristics 3 5 technical data 3 61 terminal connection diagram 3 60 SM 322 DO 16 x 24VDC charact
125. 500 mV 1 V 2 5 V Table 4 4 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Voltage Ranges Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Units SaomV 250mV 500mv stv Sosy Deck Hexe Range 394 071 gt 293 97 gt 587 94 gt 1 175 gt 2 9397 32767 7FFFy Overflow 94 071 293 97 587 94 1 175 2 9397 32511 7EFFy Overrange 80 003 250 01 500 02 1 00004 2 5001 27649 6C01 80 000 250 00 500 00 1 000 2 500 27648 6C00 60 000 187 50 375 00 0 750 1 875 20736 51004 Nominal range 60 000 187 50 375 00 0 750 1 875 20736 AF004 80 000 250 00 500 00 1 000 2 500 27648 9400 280 003 250 01 500 02 1 00004 2 5001 27649 93FF 3 Underrange 94 74 293 98 587 96 1 175 2 93398 32512 8100 lt 94 074 lt 293 98 lt 587 96 lt 1 175 lt 2 93398 32768 80004 Underflow S7200 and Mao Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 5 Analog Modules Voltage and Current Measuring Ranges Table 4 5 shows the representation of the digitized measured value e for the voltage measuring ranges 5 V 10 V and e for the current measuring ranges 10 mA 3 2 mA 20 mA Table 4 5 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Voltage and Current Measuring Ranges Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Units Ran
126. 55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters record 1 to addressed signal module 56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters record 0 or 1 from the CPU to the addressed signal module 57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters records 0 and 1 from the CPU to the addressed signal module 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Description of the Parameters A 2 Parameters Note The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module classes The parameters for the configurable signal modules are described e inthis reference manual e inthe on line help of STEP 7 The data sheets of the individual signal modules describe which parameters can be set for each signal module Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Table A 1 contains all the parameters which you can set for digital input modules The comparison shows e which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and e which parameters you can change with SFC 55 WR_PARM The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57 Table A 1 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameter Data Configurable with nal eek os a Programming Device Input delay No Yes Diagnostics No Yes Process interrupt enable Yes Yes Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes Process int
127. 6ES7 331 7KF01 0ABO Characteristic Features The analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit has the following characteristic features Resolution 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Measured value resolution settable per group depending on the integration time set Qhbits sign 12 Bit sign 14 Bit sign Measuring method selectable per channel group Voltage Current Resistance Temperature Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Two channels with limit monitoring Programmable limit interrupt Galvanic isolation to CPU Galvanic isolation to load voltage not for 2 wire transducer The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time selected In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be see Technical Specifications of the analog input module and Table 4 3 4 60 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 4 22 shows the module view and the block diagram of the SM 331 Al8 amp x 12 Bit The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected see Technical Specifications You will find the detailed technical specifications of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit on the following pag
128. 7 300 0 cece eee eens 1 11 Modules for extended environmental conditions 0 1 13 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 2 A to Atypical Operating Conditions 00 ccc eet ttn e en ees 2 4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 5 A to Atypical Operating Conditions 0 0 ccc cece eee tenes 2 9 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A to Atypical Operating Conditions s 2 saeheckwosved yids kisdeahden uses Static and Dynamic Parameters of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts 00sec cence eee eee Assignment of Parameters to the 16 Digital Inputs of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Parameters of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Did nosiies MiGr PIs a etonnestewede cebvetkered en chewed en esles Delay Times of the Input Signal of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts 0 ccc cece cece eee eee Diagnostics Messages of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts 6 eee 15 Diagnostics Messages Error Causes and Error Correction Dependence of the Input Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Power Supply L of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts 0 66 eee eee Static and Dynamic Parameters of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5A with Diagnostics Inter
129. 7589 32767 7FFFy 11 7589 11 7589 32511 7EFFy 10 0004 10 0004 27649 6C01y 10 0000 10 0000 27648 6CO0 7 50000 7 50000 20736 5100H 0 0 0 Negative value not Not possible possible Range Overflow Overcontrol range Rated range Undercontrol range Underflow Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 Table 4 47 contains the representation of the digitized measured value for the climate temperature range of the Pt 100 sensor Table 4 47 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for the Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 130 C gt 155 00 155 00 130 01 130 00 120 00 Decimal 32767 15500 13001 13000 12000 Hexadeci mal 7FFFy 3C8CH 32CC94 32C8y D1204 Range Overflow Overcontrol range Rated range 4 122 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Table 4 47 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for the Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 130 C 120 01 145 00 lt 145 00 Decimal 12001 14500 32768 Hexadeci mal D11Fy C75Cy 80004 Range Undercontrol range Underflow Analog Value Table 4 48 contains the representation of the O to 10 V output range Table 4 48 Representation of the analog output range from 0 to 10 V Out
130. A 22 737 ma 31432 31432 7AC8H 8538H 4 78 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 6 Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit In this Section In this section you will find information on e The characteristics of the analog input module SM 331 Al2 x 12 Bit e The technical specifications of the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit You will also learn e How to start up the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit e Which measuring ranges the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit has e Which parameters can be used to influence the characteristics of the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 79 Analog Modules 4 6 1 Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit Order No 6ES7 331 7KB01 0ABO Characteristic Features The analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit has the following characteristic features Resolution Two inputs in one channel group Measured value resolution depending on the integration time set Qhbits sign 12 bits sign 14 bits sign Measuring method selectable per channel group Voltage Current Resistance Temperature Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diag
131. A SN N tie by N M6 N Oo e ESS pg ie Je E 15 800 6 ls 830 gt 15 Figure C 8 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width 2000 mm Rail Figure C 9 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm rail AT 122 he l 2000 6 Figure C 9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications C 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Dimension Drawings Rail for Insert and Remove Function Figure C 10 shows the dimension drawing of the rail for the Insert and Remove function with active bus module S7 300 module and explosion proof partition The rail is 482 6 mm or 530 mm long Explosion proof partition 7 300 module 152 166 Active bus module 59 Rail for the Insert and Remove function 122 125 155 Figure C 10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for Insert and Remove Function with Active Bus Module S7 300 Module and Explosion proof Partition S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 7 Dimension Drawings Bus Modules Expansion Buses Figure C 11 shows the dimension drawing of the active bus module for the Insert and Remove function
132. A tas i 20 M M 20 2 M L J Wiring with TPA Terminal number Terminal block 1 A EG mMm mMoovowW x lt Terminal block 2 Y N7TTQOQT7MVOWODY Figure 9 2 Connection Example Allocation of Front Connector to Terminal Block The upper socket of the front connector is the connection for terminal block 1 and the lower socket is the connection for terminal block 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 9 5 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Shield Connection 9 6 The screen for the shielded signal leads can be connected to ground e viaa shield support on the analog module and e via the shielding plate on the terminal block The shield for the signal leads can be placed directly on the terminal block To do so afix a shielding plate to the terminal block prior to installation Figure 9 3 shows that the shielding plate is at the rear of the terminal block thus providing a connection to the grounded mounting rail Connect the shield for the signal leads to the shielding plate via the terminal elements This method of shield connection is described in Chapter 6 of the manual entitled S7 300 Hardware and Installation as well as in Chapter 5 of the manual entitled ET 200M Distributed I O Device Figure 9 3 shows a schematic sketch of the terminal block with shielding plate Shield support for terminal Loosen element and round sheath shielding plate ribbon cable in d
133. AD00 0AB0 revision level 3 314 from 6ES7 314 1AE01 0AB0 revision level 6 314 IFM from 6ES7 314 5AE00 0AB0 revision level 1 315 from 6ES7 315 1AFO0 0ABO revision level 3 315 2 from 6ES7 315 2AF00 0ABO revision level 3 614 from 6ES7 614 1AH01 0AB3 revision level 6 ET 200M with the IM 153 1 from 6ES7 153 1AA02 0XB0 revision level 1 IM 153 2 from 6ES7 153 2Ax00 0XB0 revision level 1 IM 153 3 from 6ES7 153 3AA00 0XB0 revision level 1 and with the following DP masters IM 308C from 6ES5 308 3UC11 revision level 3 and CPUs 41x from 6ES7 41x 2XG00 0AB0 revision level 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 9 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 3 3 shows the terminal diagram and the block diagram of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts Detailed technical specifications for the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts follow on the next pages Group fault LED SF red lo SF L L eo 0 4 z
134. Backup Batteries S7 300 Modules As regards transport and storage conditions S7 300 modules more than meet the requirements of IEC 1131 Part 2 The following data applies to S7 300 modules transported or stored in their original packing Condition Permissible Range Free fall lt 1m 3 28 ft Temperature 40 C to 70 C 40 F to 158 F Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa corresponding to an altitude of 1000 to 3500 m Relative humidity 5 to 95 no condensation Transporting Backup Batteries Wherever possible transport backup batteries in their original packing Special approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for S7 300 systems A backup battery contains about 0 25 g of lithium Note According to the transport regulations for air freight backup batteries are materials of danger class 9 Storing Backup Batteries ZN 1 6 Store backup batteries in a dry and cool place Backup batteries can be stored for five years Warning If backup batteries are not treated properly they can ignite explode and cause severe burning Store backup batteries in a dry and cool place 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specifications 1 4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7 300s Operating Conditions S7 300 systems are intended for stationary use
135. Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 71 Analog Modules Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 272 g 9 6 oz Module Specific Data Number of inputs 8 Surge protection in accordance with IEC 1000 4 5 Length of cable shielded External protection device required in the signal lines 150 V 14 mm MOV on each and input to chassis ground max 200 m 218 yd Voltages and Currents Galvanic isolation e between channels and back plane bus Permissible common mode voltage between channels between channel and Minternal Current consumption e from back plane bus Power losses of the module Yes tested at 500 VAC 50 VDC 35 V RMS 50 VDC 35 V RMS typ 120 mA max 130 mA typ 0 6 W max 1 4 W all channels in current mode A D Conversion Method Integrations conversion time resolution per channel e Programmable e Filter setting in ms e Channel integration time 1 fl in ms e Module update time in ms max 8 channels enabled same filter setting e Channel update time per active channel group with more than one channel group enabled or with channel group 2 or 3 only enabled e Channel update time per channel group if only channel group 0 or 1 is enabled e Resolution in b
136. C Reliable isolation to DIN VDE 0106 Part System frequency 101 e Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz Lt a Bridging of power failures e Permiss range 47 Hz to 63 Hz at 93 and or 187 V min 20 ms Rated input current e Repeat rate minis e at230V 1 7A Efficiency 89 e at120V 3 5A Power input 270 W Inrush current at 25 C 77 F 55A 2 2 Power losses typ 30 W It at inrush current 9 Afs Diagnostics Output Rating LED for output voltage available Yes green LED Output voltage e Rated value 24 VDC e Permiss range 24V 5 proof against open circuit e Ramp up time max 2 5 s Output current e Rated value 10A cannot be connected in parallel configurations Short circuit protection Electronic nonlatching 1 1 to 1 3 x In Residual ripple max 150 mVss S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 15 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Introduction A range of digital modules are available for the S7 300 programmable controller to connect sensors transducers and or loads actuators Digital Modules This chapter contains the technical specifications of the digital modules of the 7 300 Apart from the technical specifications this chapter also describes e The characteristics e The special features e The module view and the block diagram of the digital modules Contents This chap
137. C 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt You will find the block diagram and the detailed technical specifications for the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt on the following pages Group fault LED SF red o SF l 2 L o FO DS of 0 3 7w P o F1 EEN ola 5 7H o F2 BeBe o 2 1 7H o F3 pp 8 P of 3 MOE o 10 3 1 NN o F4 PIER 5 p o 4 BPH o F5 CEES ol 5 AE Ps o F6 w1 ol 6 mite Ae Go F7 w1 l 7 _ 19 PW x 2 o 20 3 4 M ae Channel number channel fault F Status LEDs green Fault LEDs red Terminal connection diagram Figure 3 11 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 39 Digital Modules Block Diagram Figure 3 12 shows the block diagram of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt le L Monitoring O L E Fuse Monitoring 4 P Control Al mo Output B se Output DESM Output B tatus drivers Backplane 8 x mO bus Logic Hl i Channel status LED 8x 0 to 7 green Channel fault LED 8x Wy F 0 to 7 red
138. Configuring error analog input module analog output module Connecting cables for SIMATIC TOP connect 8 11 a notes SIMATIC TOP connect 8 15 Connection to analog output loads actuators 4 34 Conversion time analog input channel analog output channel Converting analog values CSA Current output analog output module SM 332 AO 2 analog output module SM 332 AO 4 Current measurement analog input module SM 331 Al 2 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 Cycle time analog input module 40 analog output module 4 102 4 95 4 88 4 68 D Data records for parameters Default setting analog output module SM 332 AO 2 4 101 analog output module SM 332 AO 4 PETNI SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 42 Default settings SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupt Degree of protection IP 20 Design electrical analog input output module SM 334 4 113 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index 3 Index Diagnostics analog input output module analog output module analog input module channel specific of the analog modules parameter block 4 52 SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts 3 13 3 15 SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 44 Diagnostics interrupt enable analog input module analog output module SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interr
139. DC characteristics 3 74 terminal connection diagram 3 75 SM 338 POS input module SM 338 POS input module 5 7 SM 374 simulator module Spare parts D 1 Spring loaded connections SIMATIC TOP connect Interference frequency suppression analog input module Substitute value Glossary 5 analog output module digital output module ea value enable digital output module A 5 System diagnostics System data area diagnostics data T Technical specifications RS 485 repeater Temperature measurement analog input module SM 331 Al 2 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 Terminal block 8 3 terminal assignments Test voltages Thermo resistance measurement 4 69 Thermocouple 4 26 choice of connections 4 29 connecting design 4 26 principle of aa a26 ieee junction 4 27 4 27 types 4 26 with ee aie box without compensating bor Transducer 2 wire 4 wire connecting 4 19 Two wire transducer 4 analog input module Sh 331 Al 8 4 68 connection measuring ranges U UL 1 3 User program V Response with CPU STOP analog output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 3 43 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index 9 Index Vibrations Wire break analog input module A 7 Voltage rated Wiring the front connector SIMATIC TOP Voltage output connect analog output modu
140. Default Setting The default setting for interrupts is disabled Diagnostics Interrupt If an error for example sensor supply missing is detected or remedied the module triggers a diagnostics interrupt provided the diagnostics interrupt is enabled The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of priority classes with low priority and processes the diagnostics interrupt block OB 82 Process Interrupt Depending on the configuration the module can trigger for each channel group a process interrupt either in case of rising falling or both edges of a signal state change In the user program you can use SFCs to find out which one of the two channels of a channel group has triggered the interrupt see Reference Manual System and Standard Functions Pending process interrupts trigger process interrupt processing in the CPU OB 40 The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority classes with low priority The signal module can buffer one interrupt per channel If no priority classes with higher priority are to be processed the buffered interrupts of all modules are processed in the sequence in which they have occurred Process Interrupt Lost In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that channel before it has been processed by the CPU a diagnostics interrupt process interrupt lost is triggered More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until pro
141. EB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 10 Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit In this Section In this section you will get to know e The characteristic features of the analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit e The technical specifications of the analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit You will learn e How to start up the analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit e Which measuring and output ranges the analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit has 4 10 1 Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit Order No 6ES7 334 0CE01 0AA0 Characteristic Features The analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit has the following characteristic features e Four input and two output channels e Resolution 8 bits e Measuring range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA e Output range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA e Both voltage and current output options e Non isolated to CPU e Galvanic isolation to load voltage Special Feature Measuring Range and Output Range Selection You cannot assign parameters to the SM 334 analog input output module with four 8 bit analog input channels and two 8 bit analog output channels Select the measuring range of the input channels and the output range of the output channels via the wiring see Figure 4 28 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Modu
142. Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Table 4 22 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules Possible Error Causes Remedies continued Diagnostics Message Wire break Possible Error Cause Resistance too high in the sensor connection Remedy Use different type of sensor or connection e g use conductors with a larger cross sectional core area Open circuit between module and sensor Close circuit Channel not connected open Deactivate channel group measure type parameter Connect channel Measuring range underflow Input value underflows underrange error may be caused e with measuring range betw 4 and 20 mA 1 to 5 V by polarity reversal of sensor connection by incorrect measuring range selected e with other measuring ranges by incorrect measuring range selected Check terminals Configure other measuring range Configure other measuring range Measuring range overflow Input value overflows overrange Configure other measuring range Diagnostics of the Analog Output Modules Table 4 23 gives an overview of the diagnostic messages of the analog output modules Enabling is executed in the Diagnostics parameter block see Section 4 3 4 The diagnostics information is assigned to the individual channels or to the module as a whole Table 4 23 Diagnostics Message of the Analog Output Modules
143. NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 75 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Diagnostics functions None Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120 mm Sensor Selection Data WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Input voltage Weight approx 200 g e Rated value 24 VDC Module Specific Data eat 1 signal 11 to 30 V Number of input points 8 e at 0 signal 3t05V Number of output points 8 Input current Length of cable e at 1 signal typ 7 mA e Unshielded max 600m 654 yd Input delay time e Shielded max 1000m 1090 yd e irom 0 to 1 1 2 to 4 8 ms Voltages Currents Potentials e from 1 to 0 1 2 to 4 8 ms Rated load voltage L 24 VDC Input characteristic to IEC 1131 type 2 e Reverse polarity protection Yes i Connection of 2 wire BEROs Possible for input supply e Permissible closed circuit max 2mA No of inputs controllable current simultaneous r Actuator Selection Data e Horizontal installation up to 60 C 8 Output voltage e Vertical installation e at 1 signal min L 0 5 V up to 40 C 8 Output current Total current of the outputs e at 1 signal per group Rated value 0 5 A e Horizontal installation Permiss range 5 mA to 0 6 A up to 60 C max 4 A e at 0 signal e Vertical installation Residual current max 0 5 mA up to 40 C max 4 A Load impedance 48 Q to 4 kQ Galvanic isolation L iad 5 W between channels and Yes eS m backplane bus
144. O 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A X with diagnostics interrupt SM 323 X DI 16 DO 16 x DC 24 V 0 5 A SM 323 X S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect Connection to Terminal Block for 1 Conductor Initiators In Tables 8 3 and 8 8 you will find the digital modules that can be connected with the terminal block for 1 conductor initiators When connecting the supply voltage note the following The supply voltage is generally connected to the front connector see description of the relevant digital ouput module In the example in Figure 8 7 you must connect L at the positive connection of the upper terminal and M at the negative connection of the lower terminal Note With the digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt the description on the terminal block does not match the description on the digital output group Figure 8 7 shows the wiring principle and the connection to the supply voltage lence L 1 oo 2 3 a 4 56 z 7 B 8 8 9 5 10 e 11 12 amp 13 s 14 2 19 o umas 17 18 19 M 207 Z n Front OO OCO connector polili lesel
145. S 485 Repeater Technical Specifications Power supply e Rated voltage 24 VDC e Ripple 18 VDC to 30 VDC Current consumption at rated voltage e without node at PG OP socket 100 mA e Node at PG OP socket 5 V 90 mA 130 mA e Node at PG OP socket 24 V 100 mA 200 mA Galvanic isolation Yes 500 VAC Connection of fiber optic cables Yes via repeater adapters Redundancy operation No Baud rate 9 6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud Degree of protection IP 20 Dimensions W x H x D Ne 128 x 67 mm 1 8 x 5 x 2 6 in Weight incl packing 350 g 12 3 02 Note For harsh industrial environments a special RS 485 repeater with degree of protection IP 65 is available a special RS 485 repeater is also available for redundancy operation A detailed description of these RS 485 repeaters is contained in the SINEC L2 L2FO Network Manual S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 7 5 RS 485 Repeater Pin Assignment of the Sub D Connector PG OP Socket The 9 pin sub D connector has the following pin assignment Table 7 5 Pin Assignment of the 9 Pin Sub D Connector PG OP Socket View Pin No Signal Name Designation 2 M24V Ground 24 V 3 RxD TxD P Data line B 4 RTS Request To Send 5 M5V2 Data reference potential from station 6 P5V2 Supply plus from station 7 P24V 24 V 8 RxD TxD N Data line A 9
146. SIEMENS Preface Contents General Technical Specifications i Power Supply Modules SIMATIC ai Digital Modules S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Other Signal Modules Analog Modules Interface Modules Reference manual RS 485 Repeater This manual is part of the following documentation packages with order nos SIMATIC TOP connect S7 300 Programmable Controller 6ES7 398 8AA03 8BA0 ET 200M Distributed I O Device SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 6ES7 153 1AA00 8BA0 oO Appendices Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Dimension Drawings Spare Parts and Accessories for S7 300 Modules Guidelines for Handling Electro static Sensitive Devices ESD List of Abbreviations EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Glossary Index Edition 2 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to protect the product and connected equipment These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger Danger AN tions are not taken indicates that death severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precau Warning ZN tions are not taken indicates that death severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precau Caution
147. SM 332 AO 2 analog output module SM 332 AO 4 analog input module 4 49 al module SM 331 Al 8 4 67 4 87 Dummy module 5 4 Input delay SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts 314 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC directive Environmental conditions EPROM error SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 45 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index Error causes analog input module analog output module SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts 3 16 SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt Error display Substitute value SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 43 Substitute a value SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt Substitute values analog output module SM 332 AO 4 4 96 4 103 F Missing load voltage SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt FM approval 1 3 Four wire transducer 4 19 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 4 68 connection 4 32 measuring ranges Front connector module with flat ribbon connection 8 3 Fuse blown SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts 3 16 SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 45 G Limit value analog input module Grounded operation RS 485 repeater H Hardware interrupt Glossary 2
148. TOP Dynamic SFC 55 in user program RUN Default Settings The SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts has the following default settings for diagnostics interrupts etc see Table 3 3 These default settings are active if you have not set any parameters with STEP 7 Assignment of Sensor Supplies The two sensor supplies are used to supply two groups of channels inputs O to 7 and inputs 8 to 15 You can also set the diagnostics for the sensor supply in these channel groups see Table 3 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 12 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Parameter Assignment Table 3 2 shows the parameter assignment for the respective inputs of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts You can configure the module in these input groups channel groups You will need the numbers of the channel groups to configure the user program with SFCs see also Figure A 3 in Appendix A Table 3 2 Assignment of Parameters to the 16 Digital Inputs of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Parameter Can be Set in the Following Channel Channel Groups Group Number 0 and 1 0 2 and 3 1 4and5 2 Process interrupt 6 and 7 3 on falling or Inputs rising edge ghee pee 10 and 11 5 12 and 13 6 14 and 15 7 Diagnostics interrupt ae suppl i Inputs a hee g 8 to 15 missing P
149. TOP connect with the terminal block for the 2A modules Note that you will also need the front connector for the 2A modules Table 8 10 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP Connect for 2A Modules Digital Modules SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 2 A Connection Notes Power supply at front connector only add ground conn at terminal block X at front connector or terminal block Add jumper required for power supply Descr on terminal block not in line with descr on SM S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 19 SIMATIC TOP connect Connection to Terminal Block for 2A Module You can use the terminal block for 2A modules to wire the SM 322 8 x DO 24VDC 2A Please observe the following when connecting the power supply e You must connect the power supply to both potential terminals on the front connector with separate cables e In addition to the round sheath ribbon cable you must provide each terminal block with a line for M1 or M2 Connect M1 or M2 via a separate line with the front connector and the terminal block You can jumper the potential of M1 and M2 yourself Figure 8 9 shows the principle of wiring and the connection of the power supply
150. WA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 13 Power Supply Modules Reaction to Atypical Operating Conditions Table 2 3 gives information on the reaction of the power supply module to atypical operating conditions Table 2 3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A to Atypical Operating Conditions If Then 24 VDC LED the output circuit is overloaded e gt 13A dynamic Voltage dip automatic voltage recovery Flashes e 10A lt 1I1S 13A steady state Voltage drop shortening of service life the output is short circuited Output voltage 0 V automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been Dark eliminated an overvoltage occurs on the primary Possible destruction side there is an undervoltage on the Automatic disconnection automatic Dark primary side voltage recovery 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 14 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the PS 307 power supply module 10 A are listed below Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters Dimensions W x H x D 200 x 125 x 120 mm Protection class to IEC 536 with protective 7 8 x 4 88 x 4 68 in DIN VDE 0106 Part 1 grounding conductor Weight 1 2 kg 2 64 Ib Insulation Input Rating e Rated insulation level 250 VAC maa 24 V to L1 Be eae e Tested with 2800 VDC e Rated value 120 V 230 VA
151. amo iA a 5 3 Seg cues P 6 4 o a o 5 oh Nao a 8 d Backplane bus satan a o 7 interface o o o Haca EEEE VA eae o zayi es a pe et E s ss A5 Sa a l6 o 5 SERE S13 D q 18 o 6 ao 7 ARS 19 we 20 o Channel number Status LEDs greenn Figure 3 5 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC Source Input 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 20 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120mm Input voltage 1 56 x 4 88 x e Rated value 24 VDC 4 68 in e for 1 signal 13 to 30 V Weight approx 200 g e for 0 signal 3 to 5 V Module Specific Data Input current Number of input points 16 e at 1 signal typ 7 mA Length of cable Input delay e Unshielded max 600 m 654 yd e from 0 to 1 1 2 to 4 8 ms e Shielded max 1000 m e from 1 to 0 1 2 to 4 8 ms 1090 yd Input characteristic to IEC 1131 type 1 Voltages Currents Potentials Connection of 2 wire BEROs Possible Rated load voltage L 24 VDC e Permissible closed circuit current e Reverse polarity protection Yes max 1 5 mA Number of input points that can be driven simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 60 C 16 e Vertical installation up to 40 C 16 Galvanic isolation between channels a
152. ange Type J Table 4 14 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the temperature range sensor type J Table 4 14 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type J Temperature Units Range in C Type J Decimal Hexadecimal gt 1450 32767 7FFFy 1450 14500 38A4y 1201 12010 2EEAy 1200 12000 2EE0y 210 0 2100 F7CCy lt 210 lt 2100 lt F7CCy underflow below FOC5y and outputs 8000p Range Overflow Overrange Nominal range Underrange In the case of incorrect wiring e g polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range e g incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module signals S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 13 Analog Modules Temperature Range Type E Table 4 15 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the temperature range sensor type E Table 4 15 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Ranges Type E Temperature Units Range Range in C Type E Decimal Hexadecimal gt 1201 32767 7FFFy Overflow 1200 12000 2EE0u Overrange 1001 10010 271Ay 1000 10000 27104 i Nominal range 270 2700 F574y lt 271 lt 2700 lt F574y Underrange In the case of incorrect wiring e g polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor e
153. arameters of the Digital Input Module Table 3 3 provides an overview of the parameters of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts and shows which parameters e are static or dynamic or e can be set for the complete module or for one channel group each Table 3 3 Parameters of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Parameter SM 321 DI 16 x DC24V with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Value Range Default Type Scope Enable e Process interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module e Diagnostics interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module Diagnostics e Sensor supply missing Yes no No Static Channel group Trigger for process interrupt e Rising edge Yes no No Dynamic Channel group e Falling edge Yes no No Dynamic Channel group S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 13 Digital Modules Input Delay Table 3 4 shows the possible settings and their tolerances for the input delay times of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts Table 3 4 Delay Times of the Input Signal of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Input Delay Tolerance 0 1 ms 87 5 to 112 5 us 0 5 ms 0 43 to 0 57 ms 3 ms default 2 62 to 3 38 ms 15 ms 13 1 to 16 9 ms 20 ms 20 to 25 ms Diagnostics With the diagnostics feature you can determine if errors occur
154. asurement start up 4 64 technical specifications temperature measurement voltage measurement 4 68 Analog input channel diagnostics byte Tightening torque SIMATIC TOP connect 8 9 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index Output analog output module current SM 332 AO 2 current SM 332 AO 4 voltage SM 332 AO 2 voltage SM 332 AO 4 Analog output module output type configuring error conversion time cycle time diagnestios P diagnostics ar i error causes isolated load voltage missing 4 54 M short circuit 4 54 non isolated output output range parameters parameter assignment error 4 54 group diagnostics response with CPU STOP 4 50 Output type analog output module Output range analog output module SM 332 AO 2 4 102 analog output module 4 50 of the analog outputs SM 334 Auxiliary power missing SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 4 50 Backup battery transport and storage conditions el Basic settings analog input module 4 49 Module types caa A C Cable for a signals 4 19 4 34 CE marking Channel groups analog input module SM 331 Al 2 4 84 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 Common mode error analog input module Compensating box Compensating leads
155. at is adapted to the load will enhance the service life of the contacts Contact circuit internal None Parallel connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load e to increase power Actuation of a digital input Switching frequency e Mechanical e Resistive loads e Inductive loads to IEC 947 5 1 DC13 AC 15 e Lamp loads Possible Not possible Possible max 10 Hz max 2 Hz max 0 5 Hz max 2 Hz S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 69 Digital Modules 3 4 Digital Input Output Modules List of Digital Input Output Modules The following digital input output modules are described in this chapter e SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A e SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5A 3 4 1 Digital Input Output Module SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A Order No 6ES7 323 1BL00 0AA0 Characteristics The digital input output module 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A has the following salient features e 16 output points isolated in groups of 16 e 16 output points isolated in groups of 8 e Rated input voltage 24 VDC e 24VDC rated load voltage e Inputs suitable for switches and 2 3 4 wire proximity switches BEROs e Outputs suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Special Feature When the power supply is switched on via a mechanical contact the digital output module SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x
156. ation Requirements in respect of Emitted Immunity interference Industry EN 50081 2 1993 EN 50082 2 1995 If you operate an S7 300 in a residential area you must ensure Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions Measures to achieve interference suppression according to Limit Value Class B e mounting the S7 300 in a grounded cabinet or case e use of filters in supply lines UL Approval UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories UL to Standard UL 508 Report 116536 CSA Approval CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association CSA to Standard C22 2 No 142 Report LR 48323 FM Approval Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611 Class Division 2 Group A B C D Warning Personal injury or property damage can result In areas subject to danger of explosion personal injury or property damage can result if you withdraw connectors while an S7 300 is in operation Always isolate the S7 300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before withdrawing connectors UL CSA FM Approval for SIMATIC Outdoor Modules For the SIMATIC Outdoor Modules for use under extended environmental conditions the respective UL CSA and FM approvals have been applied for 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 1 3 General Technical Specifications 1 2 Definition Electromagnetic
157. between the free ends The magnitude of the thermo e m f generated depends on the difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference the free ends must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the measuring junction 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 26 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Extension to a Reference Junction The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to a point of known temperature reference junction by means of compensating wires These compensating wires consist of the same material as the thermocouple wires The supply leads are copper wire You should use external compensation in this case Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity otherwise there will be considerable measurement errors External Compensation You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference junction by means of compensating leads for example by connecting a compensating box The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction temperature The reference junction is formed by the connections for the ends of the thermocouple s compensating leads If the actual tempera
158. between the inputs of different groups Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus Module power losses Number of input points that can 16 16 Yes Yes 4 120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC max 16 mA typ 4 1 W Input voltage e Rated value e for 1 signal e for 0 signal e Frequency range Input current e at 1 signal Input delay e from 0 to 1 e from 1 to 0 Input characteristic Connection of 2 wire BEROs Permissible closed circuit current 120 VAC 79 to 132 V 0 to 20 V 47 to 63 Hz typ 6 mA max 25 ms max 25 ms to IEC 1131 type 1 Possible max 1 mA Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions Green LED per channel None None 3 24 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 1 6 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230 VAC Order No 6ES7 321 1FF01 OAA0 Characteristics The digital input module SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230 VAC has the following salient features e 8 input points isolated in groups of 2 e 120 230 VAC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and 2 3 wire AC proximity switches S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 25 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 7 shows the termi
159. ble Possible Possible Possible max 820 Q Programmable e Type E N J K L e Pt 100 standard climate range Ni 100 standard climate range Programmable Possible Possible S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 63 Analog Modules 4 4 2 Starting Up the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit Parameter Assignment The analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit is set e by means of measuring range modules on the module and e with STEP 7 see also the STEP 7 User Manual or e inthe user program by means of SFCs see STEP 7 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual Default Setting The analog input module has default settings for the integration time diagnostics interrupts etc see Table 4 19 These default settings apply if you have not re initialized the module with STEP 7 Channel Groups The channels of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit are arranged in groups of two You can only assign parameters to one channel group at a time The analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit has a measuring range module for each channel group Table 4 28 shows which channels of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit are configured as one channel group You will need the channel group numbers to set the parameters in the user program with SFC see Fig A 3 in Appendix A Table 4 28 Assignment of the Channels of th
160. ble e From 0 to 1 e From 1 to 0 Input characteristic Connection of 2 wire BEROs e Permiss closed circuit current AC 120 V 47 to 63 Hz 74 to 132 V 0 to 20 V max 27 mA typ 21 mA No max 15 ms max 25 ms to IEC 1131 Type 2 Possible lt 4mA 3 30 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 2 Digital Output Modules List of Digital Output Modules The following digital output modules are described in this chapter e SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A e SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A e SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt e SM322 D08 x 24 VDC 2 A e SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC 1A e SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230 VAC 2 A e SM 322 DO 32x 120 VAC 1 0 A 3 2 1 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A Order No 6ES7 322 1BL00 0AA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A has the following salient features e 32 output points isolated in groups of 8 e 0 5 A output current e 24 VDC rated load voltage e Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Special Feature When the power supply is switched on via a mechanical contact the digital output module SM 322 SO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A sends a 1 signal to its outputs for approximately 50 us You must observe this when using the digital output module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A for high speed cou
161. ble max 1 5 mA Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LED per channel None None S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 5 Digital Modules 3 1 2 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC Order No Characteristics The digital input module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC has the following salient features e 16 input points isolated in groups of 16 e 24VDC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and 2 3 4 wire BEROs proximity switches 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 2 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital input module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module on the following page 1 4L o O 2 o 0 DESE Cas 1 ih i eo aye q a 4 o 2 M Ho o age 5 o 3 Pres iye a 4 Seem ee a ol 5 En eee
162. ble B 1 Channel information available User information available Figure B 1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostics Data Module Types Table B 1 lists the codes of the module types bits 0 to 3 in byte 1 Table B 1 Codes of the Module Types Code Module Type 0101 Analog module 0110 CPU 1000 Function module 1100 CP 1111 Digital module B 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 2 and 3 Figure B 2 shows the contents of bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostics data 76543210 Byte 2 0 Memory module or measuring range module for analog modules incorrect or missing Communication fault Operating status 0 RUN 1 STOP Cycle time out Module internal supply voltage failure Battery empty Complete backup failure 76543210 Byte 3 0 Rack failure Processor failure EPROM error RAM error ADC DAC error Fuse blown Process interrupt lost Figure B 2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 B 3 Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Bytes 4 to 7 Figure B 3 shows the contents of bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostics data 7654321 0 Byte 4 soo o Channel type B 16 70 D
163. bonding conductors between the measuring points You can operate the CPU as follows S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 23 Analog Modules Analog Input module CPU Isolated Non floating bridge between A and M or floating no bridge between amp and M Non isolated Non floating bridge between A and M Figure 4 3 shows the principle of connecting non isolated sensors to an isolated analog input module L A M M Non isolated M sensors a7 M ADC Lo lt M gic Backplane a bus pe U be Mana lt Equipotential CPU bonding Uiso a conductor o e Ee Minternal o L UE Ground bus Figure 4 3 Connecting Non Isolated Sensors to an Isolated Analog Input Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 24 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Non Isolated Sensors continued Figure 4 4 shows the principle of connecting non isolated sensors to a non isolated analog input module L A M M Non isolated A M sensors L i M ADC Logic M Backplane pels bus Ucm M y ANA CPU 2 A Equipotential to M bondin
164. c see Table 3 9 These default settings are active if you have not set any parameters with STEP 7 Parameter Assignment With the SM 322 DO 8 x DC 24V 0 5 A using diagnostics interrupts you can configure each output individually S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 42 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Parameters of the Digital Output Module Table 3 9 provides an overview of the parameters of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt and shows which parameters e are static or dynamic and which e can be set for the complete module or individual channels Table 3 9 Parameters of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt Parameter SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5A with Diagnostics Interrupt Value Range Default Type Scope Enable e Diagnostics interrupt Yes no No Dynamic Module Response on CPU STOP e Hold last value LWH Yes no No Dynamic Module e Substitute a value EWS Yes no No Dynamic Module Substitute value 0 1 0 Dynamic Module Group diagnostics Yes no No Static Channel Test for Short circuit to M Short circuit to L Wire break Missing load voltage L 1 If the wire break diagnostics enable parameter is not set the channel fault error LEDs do not indicate a fault on a wire break Diagnostics With the diagnostics feature you can determine if errors occur on signal output Configuration of Diagn
165. cations EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 5 SIMATIC TOP connect Selection Table The following selection table shows to which SIMATIC TOP connect components the digital modules can be wired Please observe the Notes for Connection in Section Table 8 3 Selection Table for SIMATIC TOP Connect Components Digital Modules Terminal Block Front Connector for for for 2A for SM for 2A 1 conductor 3 conductor modules 16 or 32 modules connection connection channels SM 321 DI16 x 24 VDC X X X SM 321 DI16 x 24 VDC X X xX source input SM 322 DO32 x 24 VDC 0 5 V X X X SM 322 DO16 x DC VDC 0 5 V X X X SM 322 DO8 x 24 VDC 0 5 V X X X with diagnostics interrupt SM 322 DO8 x 24 VDC 2A X X SM323 DI 16 D016 x 24 VDC X X X 0 5A SM323 DI8 DO8 x 24VDC 0 5 X X X A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 8 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect 8 2 Terminal Assignments for Wiring the Terminal Block Introduction The terminal assignments are described in this section Terminal Assignment of Digital Modules The description of the bit address is printed in the top tier of the terminal block Terminal Block for 3 Conductor Initiators Table 8 4 shows the terminal assignments of the 3 conductor initiators Table 8 4 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 3 Conductor Initiators Front View of Terminal Block
166. cations 4 112 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 10 2 Starting Up the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit Electrical Design You must connect one of the chassis ground terminals Mana of the analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit to the chassis ground terminal of the CPU see Figure Use a cable with a cross section conductor of at least 1 mm for this purpose Unused Channels 4 10 3 You must short circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to Mana You thus obtain optimum interference protection for your analog module Unused output channels must be left open Measurement Method and Type of Output of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit Selecting the Measurement Method and the Type of Output Select the measuring method of an input channel voltage current by wiring the input channel appropriately Select the type of output of an output channel voltage current by wiring the output channel appropriately The analog input output module SM 332 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit cannot be programmed Addressing The module s inputs and outputs are addressed starting at the module start address The address of a channel is obtained from the module start address and an address offset S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 113 Analog Modules Input Addresses The following addresses a
167. cessing of the interrupt buffered on this channel has been executed S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 17 Digital Modules Impact of the Power Supply and the Operating State The input values on the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts depend on the power supply of the digital module and the operating state of the CPU Table 3 7 provides you with an overview of these relationships Table 3 7 Dependence of the Input Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Power Supply L of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts CPU Operating State Power Supply L to Digital Module Input Value of Digital Module POWERON RUN L exists Process value L missing 0 signal STOP L exists Process value L missing 0 signal POWER OFF L exists L missing A failure in the power supply to the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts is always indicated by the group fault LED on the front panel of the module and is also entered in the diagnostics log In case of a failure in the power supply L to the module the input value is maintained for 20 to 40 ms before the 0 signal is transferred to the CPU Power supply dips lt 20 ms do not cause a change in the process value Note If an external redundant source is applied simultaneously to the sensor supply
168. cifications 1 10 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specifications 1 6 Rated Voltages of the S7 300 Rated Operating Voltages The S7 300 and its various modules operate at different rated voltages Table 1 1 lists these rated voltages and the relevant tolerances for the S7 300 Table 1 1 Rated Voltages of the S7 300 Rated Voltage Tolerance Range 24 VDC 20 4 to 28 8 VDC 120 VAC 93 to 132 VAC 230 VAC 187 to 264 VAC S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specifications 1 7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules SIMATIC outdoor modules are modules that can be used under extended environmental conditions Extended environmental conditions means e operation possible at temperatures from 25 C to 60 C e occasional brief condensation permitted e increased mechanical stress permissible Comparison with standard modules The functional scope and technical specifications for the SIMATIC outdoor modules correspond to those of the standard modules The climatic and mechanical environmental conditions as well as the methods used to test them have changed The SIMATIC outdoor modules have their own Order Numbers see Table 1 1 Configuring in STEP 7 Do you have a STEP 7 version in which the SIMATIC outdoor modules are not in the hardware catalog Simply configure your system with the corresponding standard m
169. ckplane bus fi 1 A fi interference between channels and load Yes frequency voltage L e Common mode noise gt 70 dB EAN Upp lt 2 5 V Possible potential difference e Series mode noise peak gt 40 dB e between inputs and Mayna 2 5 VDC value of noise lt nominal Ucm value of input range atsignal 0 V MOMOLZ Wit Crosstalk between inputs gt 50 dB transducer e between Mana and Minternal 75 VDC Uiso 60 VAC e Insulation tested with 600 VDC Current consumption e from backplane bus max 60 mA e from load voltage L max 200 mA without load Power losses of the module typ 1 3 W S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 62 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Noise Suppression and Error Limits continued Sensor Selection Data continued Operational limit over entire temperature range referred to input range e 80mvV e 250 to 1000 mV e 2 5t010V e 3 2to 20 mA Basic error limit over entire temperature range referred to input range e 80mV e 250 to 1000 mV e 25t0o10V e 3 2 to 20 mA Temperature drift over entire temperature range referred to input range Linearity error referred to input range Repeatability in steady state at 25 C or 77 F referred to input range Temperature error of internal compensation E 1 t 0 6 E 0 8 0 7 E 0 6 E 0 4 0 6 0 5 t 0 005 K t 0 05 t 0
170. coder input 1 Byte 19 See byte 17 Byte 20 See byte 18 Encoder input 2 Byte 21 See byte 17 Byte 22 See byte 18 Absolute Encoder 00 None 01 13 bit 10 21 bit 11 25 bit 7 0 Byte 23 to byte 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Not relevant 5 18 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Interface Modules Interface Modules In this chapter you will find the technical specifications and characteristic features of the interface modules for the S7 300 Contents The following interface modules are described in this chapter Section Contents Page 6 1 Interface Module IM 360 6 2 6 2 Interface Module IM 361 6 4 6 3 Interface Module IM 365 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 6 1 Interface Modules 6 1 Interface Module IM 360 Order No 6ES7 360 3AA01 0AA0 Characteristics The interface module IM 360 has the following characteristic features e Interface for rack 0 of the S7 300 e Data transfer from IM 360 to IM 361 over the connecting cable 368 e Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m 32 8 ft Status and Fault LEDs The interface module IM 360 has the following status and fault LEDs LED Meaning Explanation SF Group error fault The LED lights up if e the connecting cable is missing e IM 361 is switched off
171. converted is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output channels of the analog output module Figure 4 17 illustrates the components of the cycle time for an n channel analog output module Y Conversion time channel 1 y Conversion time channel 2 gt Cycle time Y Conversion time channel n DA Figure 4 17 Cycle Time of the Analog Output Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 41 Analog Modules Settling Time The settling time to to tg that is the time elapsing between the converted value being present and reaching the specified value at the analog output is load dependent A distinction is made between resistive capacitive and inductive loads Response Time The response time t to tg that is the time elapsing between the digital output values being present in the internal memory and reaching the specified value at the analog output is in the worst case the sum of the cycle time and the settling time You have a worst case situation if shortly prior to the transfer of a new output value the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all other channels are converted cycle time Figure 4 18 shows the response time of the analog output channels ta ty t2 t3 ta Response time tz Cycle time corresponds to n x conversion time
172. ction Data Output voltage eat 1 signal min L 0 5 V Output current e at 1 signal Rated value 0 5A Permiss range 5 mA to 0 6 A e at 0 signal Residual current max 0 5 mA Load impedance 48 Q to 4kQ Lamp load max 5 W Parallel connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load Possible only outputs e to increase power of the same group Not possible Actuation of digital input Possible Switching frequency e Resistive loads max 100 Hz e Inductive loads to IEC max 0 5 Hz 947 5 1 DC 13 e Lamp loads max 10 Hz S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 73 Digital Modules 3 4 2 Digital Input Output Module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5A Order No 6ES7 323 1BH00 0AA0 Characteristics The digital input output module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A has the following salient features e 8 output points isolated in groups of 8 e 8 input points isolated in groups of 8 e Rated input voltage 24 VDC e Rated load voltage 24 VDC e Outputs suitable for switches and 2 3 4 wire proximity switches BEROs e Inputs suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Special Feature When the power supply is switched on via a mechanical contact the digital output module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A sends a 1 signal to its outputs for approximately 50 us You must observe this when using the digital ou
173. d Module power losses 24 VDC max 4 A max 2 A max 2 A Yes Yes 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC max 80 mA max 120 mA typ 4 9 W Output voltage e at 1 signal Output current e at 1 signal Rated value Permiss range e at 0 signal Residual current Load impedance Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load e to increase power Actuation of digital input Switching frequency e Resistive loads e Inductive loads to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 e Lamp loads Voltage limited on circuit interruption reduced internally to Short circuit protection of output e Response threshold min L 0 8 V 0 5A 5 mA to 0 6 A max 0 5 mA 48 Q to 4 kQ max 5 W Possible only outputs of the same group Not possible Possible max 100 Hz max 0 5 Hz max 10 Hz typ L 48 V Yes electronic 1 A typ Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions Green LED per channel None None S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 37 Digital Modules 3 2 3 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt Order No 6ES7 322 8BF00 0ABO Characteristics The digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt has the following salient features e 8 outpu
174. depends on the parameters S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 2 4 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2 A Order No 322 1BF01 0AAO Characteristics The digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC 2 A has the following salient features e 8 output points isolated in groups of 4 e 2A output current e 24 VDC rated load voltage e Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Special Feature When the power supply is switched on via a mechanical contact the digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2 A sends a 1 signal to its outputs for approximately 50 us You must observe this when using the digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2 A for high speed counters S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 47 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 13 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2 A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2 A on the following page
175. dule SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A has the following salient features e 16 output points isolated in groups of 8 e 0 5 A output current e 24 VDC rated load voltage e Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator signals Special Feature When the 24 V power supply is switched on via a mechanical contact the digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A sends a 1 signal to its outputs for approximately 50 us You must observe this when using the digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A for high speed counters S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 35 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 10 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A on the following page z 5y F Li ye 2 0 a o
176. dules 4 3 1 Conversion and Cycle Time of the Analog Input Channels Introduction In this section you will find the definitions and relations of the conversion time and cycle time for the analog input modules Conversion Time The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing times of the module for e Resistance measurement e Wire break monitoring The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method integrating method successive approximation of the analog input channel In the case of integrating conversion methods the integration time has a direct influence on the conversion time The integration time has a direct influence on the resolution You will find the basic conversion times for the individual analog modules in Section 4 3 4 You set the integration time using STEP 7 see Section 4 3 3 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 39 Analog Modules Cycle Time 4 40 Analog to digital conversion and the transfer of digitized measured values to memory and or the data bus of the programmable controller is sequential This means that the individual analog input channel values are converted one after the other The cycle time that is the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the analog input module When the analog input c
177. e Fault LEDs red Thermocouples Voltage measurement measurement Current measurement Resistance L 24V d SF Internal Current Multi Meas aige 2 Mo CHO Mo CHO 2 supply source plexer module 8 Ww H 7 Z Mo Mo D q S Bate 4 F My 4 CH1 Ico t 5 M4 lco o 6 z Mo CH2 My CH2 H Mo _ M4 o e a2 ob 8 M Int Ie v 6 A 3 CH3 C1 D q gt Tt comp f j 9 wad M3 Io1 o Ext compensation 10 Comp None g mpl o 1 Comp Mana a ADU g Ma CH4 Mes CH4 D d a 13 M4 M2 z HEN a pe y v2 2 o NJ Galvanic En Tas alt E 5 CH5 c2 isolation aca j 5 M5 lb o 1 Me cHe M3 CH6 Logicand sF 10 Me 5 M3 _ o backplane bus Ne TFS i cic interface H i IH gam oe M74 CH7 c3 o 131 M7 Ic3 o 20 M Figure 4 22 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 61 Analog Modules
178. e per group at 1 signal e horizontal installation Output with series diode at min L 1 6 V up to 40 C 104 F max 4A 1 signal up to 60 C 140 F max 3 A Output current e vertical installation n 4 oi 1 up to 40 C 104 F max 4 A AE ASN Total current of the outputs Permiss range 10 mA to 0 6 A with series diode per group e at 0 signal e horizontal installation Residual current max 0 5 mA up to 20 C 68 F max 4A Output delay with resistive load up to 40 C 104 F max 3 A P x dag up to 60 C 140 F max 2A e from 0 to 1 max 180 us e vertical installation e from 1 to 0 max 245 us up to 40 C 104 F max 3A Load impedance 48 Q to 3 kQ Galvanic isolation Lamp load max 5 W ieee ee and Yes Parallel connection of 2 outputs eee ous e for redundant actuationof a Output with series between the channels No load diode only must have Permiss potential differences the same reference potential e between different circuits 75 VDC 60 VAC e for power increase Not possible Insulation tested with 500 VDC Actuationof digital input Poss 1 binary input Current drawn to IEC 1131 2 type 2 e from backplane bus max 70 mA Switching frequency e from load voltage L max 90 mA e Resistive load max 100 Hz without load e Inductive load to IEC max 2 Hz Module power losses typ 5 W 947 5 1 DC 13 e Lamp load max 10 Hz Voltage limited on circuit interrup
179. e Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8 x 12 Bit to Channel Groups Channels form one Channel Group each Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel group 0 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel group 1 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel group 2 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel group 3 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 64 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Resistance Measurement If you use the resistance measurement method there is only one channel per channel group The 2nd channel of each group is used for current injection Ic The measured value is obtained by accessing the 1st channel of the group The 2nd channel of the group has the default carry value 7FFF Unused Input Channels You must short circuit unused channels of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit and you should connect them to Mana In this way you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module Also deactivate the unused channels using STEP 7 see Section 4 3 4 in order to reduce the module s cycle time If you do not use the COMP input you must short circuit it also Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation you should note the following points for these inputs e Measuring range 1 to 5 V Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group e Current measurement 2 wire transd
180. e L e Reverse polarity protection Number of input points that can be driven simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 60 C e Vertical installation up to 40 C Galvanic isolation e between channels and backplane bus e between the channels e between load voltage L and sensor supply Vs Permiss potential differences e between different circuits Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus e from load voltage L without sensor supply Vs Module power losses 24 VDC Yes 16 16 Yes No 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC max 55 mA max 40 mA typ 4 W e Group fault LED SF Red LED e Diagnostics information Possible readable Sensor Supply Outputs Outputs 2 Output voltage e with load min L 2 5 V Output current e Rated value e Permissible range Additional redundant supply Short circuit protection 120 mA 0 to 150 mA Permitted Yes electronic Sensor Selection Data Input voltage e Rated value e for signal 1 e for signal 0 Input current e at signal 1 Input characteristic 24 VDC 13 to 30 V 3to5V typ 7 mA to IEC 1131 type 2 Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display e Inputs e Sensor supplies Vs Interrupts e Process interrupt e Diagnostics interrupt Green LED per channel Green LED per output Configurable Configurable Connection of 2 wire BEROs Possible e Permiss
181. e Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 1 Dimension Drawings C 1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails 483 mm Standard Rail Figure C 1 shows the dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail 8 7 465 2 gt lt 163 9 155 a p 15 11 P 482 6 lt 2 gt Figure C 1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 2 Dimension Drawings 530 mm Standard Rail Figure C 2 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm standard rail 15 20 x 25 500 Eag ai ed gt 25 e y K N Te x Ce ie E E 3 5 Sici g ay Re ed er Ur J gass BA 530 az gt Figure C 2 Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail 830 mm Standard Rail Figure C 3 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm standard rail 15 32 x 25 800 m al gt 25 Ly N LO lt 2 ae ee ee Gy o Uv N EN 830 a gt Figure C 3 Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 C 3 Dimension Drawings 2000 mm Standard Rail Figure C 4 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm standard rail
182. e current measuring 0 to 20 mA range 4 to 20 mA 20 mA 4 68 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Measuring Ranges for Resistance Measurements Table 4 32 lists all of the measuring ranges for resistance measurements and the relevant measuring range module settings Table 4 32 Measuring Ranges for Resistance Measurements Measuring Method Selected Resistance 4 wire connection Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 412 Table 4 7 under the resistance measuring range Measuring Range 150 Ohm 300 Ohm 600 Ohm Measuring Range Module Setting A Measuring Ranges for Temperature Measurement Table 4 33 lists the measuring ranges or the sensor type and the measuring range module settings for temperature measurement The characteristics are linearized e for Pt 100 according to DIN IEC 751 e for Ni 100 to IEC DIN 43760 e for thermocouples to DIN 584 type L to DIN 43710 Table 4 33 Measuring Ranges for Temperature Measurement Measuring Method Selected Thermocouples linearization internal compensation thermal e m f measurement Description The digitized analog values are listed in Section 4 1 21 Tables 4 12 to 4 15 under the temperature range Measuring Range Type of Sensor TypeN NiCrSi NiSi Type E NiCr CuNi Type J Fe CuNi Type K NiCr N
183. e encoder value in the address area for encoder input 0 is read T MD 100 The encoder value is stored in the memory double word U M 100 7 The freeze status is determined and stored M 99 0 for subsequent acknowledgment L PED 260 The encoder value in the address area for encoder input 1 is read T MD 104 The encoder value is stored in the memory double word U M 104 7 The freeze status is determined and stored M 99 1 for subsequent acknowledgment L PED 264 The encoder value in the address area for encoder input 2 is read T MD 108 The encoder value is stored in the memory double word U M 108 7 The freeze status is determined and stored M 99 2 for subsequent acknowledgment L MB 99 The freeze status is loaded and T PAB 256 acknowledged SM 338 output address 256 Afterwards you can further process the encoder values from the bit memory address area MD 100 MD 104 and MD 108 The encoder value is in bits 0 to 30 of the memory double word S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules 5 3 4 Parameterization You parameterize the SM 338 with HWConfig in STEP 7 as of Version 4 1 Reparameterization using the user program is not possible Parameters of the SM 338 You enter the following parameters in STEP 7 Note also the information in the online help system Parameter per chan nel Diagnostic Interrupt Values Yes No Note
184. e from 24 VDC 0 5A Power loss typ 5 W Current output e to backplane bus 0 8 A Status and fault LEDs Yes 6 3 Interface Module IM 365 Order No 6ES7 365 0BA01 0AA0 Characteristics The interface module IM 365 has the following characteristic features e Pre assembled pair of modules for rack 0 and rack 1 e Total power supply of 1 2 A of which up to 0 8 A can be used per rack e Connecting cable with a length of 1 m 3 28 ft already permanently connected e Install only signal modules in rack 1 e IM 365 does not route the communication bus to subrack 1 6 6 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Interface Modules Front View Figure 6 3 shows the front view of the interface module IM 365 In rack 1 IM 365 IM 365 RECEIVE SEND In rack 0 Figure 6 3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 6 7 Interface Modules Technical Specifications The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 365 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D mm per rack Total weight 40 x 125 x 120 580 g 20 3 oz Module Specific Data Cable length e Maximum length to next IM Current drawn e from backplane bus Power
185. e output type and for the corresponding output range You must enter these codes in bytes 6 and 7 of record 1 according to the desired output range see Figure 4 30 Table 4 51 Codes for the Output Ranges Output Type Code Output Range Code Bits 4 to 7 Bits 0 to 3 Deactivated 2 0000 Deactivated 2 0000 Voltage 2 0001 0to10V 2 1000 4 126 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules Other Signal Modules In addition to the digital and analog modules further signal modules are available e a simulator module for simulating inputs and outputs and e a dummy module for reserving an installation slot e an SM 338 POS input module to register the SSI encoder values 5 In this chapter you will find the technical specifications for these signal modules and a description of their function Contents The following signal modules are described in this chapter Section Contents Page 5 1 Simulator Module SM 374 IN OUT 16 5 2 5 2 Dummy Module DM 370 5 4 5 3 SM 338 POS input module 5 7 S7300 and MEN Earnie Controllers Module Specifications 51 Other Signal Modules 5 1 Simulator Module SM 374 IN OUT 16 Order No 6ES7 374 2XH01 0AA0 Characteristics The simulator module SM 374 IN OUT 16 has the following salient features e Simulation of 16 input points or 16 output points or 8 input points and 8
186. ea Terminal block Terminal block Figure 8 7 Wiring of a Digital Module with Terminal Block for 1 Conductor Initiators S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect 3 Conductor Initiators The connection notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with the terminal block for 3 conductor initiators are listed in Table 8 9 Table 8 9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP Connect for 3 Conductor Initiators Digital Modules Connection Notes DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A Power supply add Descr on jumper terminal at front add ground at front required block not connector conn at connector for power in line with only terminal or terminal supply descr on block block SM SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC X X SM 321 DI 16 x24 VDC X xX SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC X xX source input SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A xX SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A X SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A X X X with diagnostics interrupt SM 323 xX DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A SM 323 xX S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 17 SIMATIC TOP connect Connection to Terminal Block for 3 Conductor Initiators Tables 8 3 and 8 9 list the digital modules which can be wired to the terminal block for 3 conductor initiators For some dig
187. ect Front Connector for 32 Channel Modules Figure 8 2 shows the front view of the front connector for 32 channel modules The terminals for the supply voltage are spring loaded see also Section 8 4 Table 8 2 indicates the assignment of the flat ribbon cable terminals to the channels of the signal modules via the address assignment Opening for the O cable to be Oz connected a O Supply termin j for eellee 1 ia llie selee O e m i selise cellis 4 Supply terminal for Meee O Legend O Openings for strain relief 6 O to 9 flat ribbon cable terminals address assignment see Table 8 2 Opening for the screwdriver Supply terminals for Supply terminals for Figure 8 2 Front Connector for 32 Channel Module Table 8 2 Assignment of the Round Sheath Ribbon Cable Terminals to the Address Bytes of the 32 Channel Modules Flat Ribbon Address Assignment for Terminal Assignment Digital Input Module Digital Output Digital Input Output _ See Module Module Figure 8 2 1 IB x QB x IB x 27 IB x 1 QB x 1 IB x 1 IB x 2 QB x 2 QB x 4 IB x 3 QB x 3 QB x 1 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifi
188. ed insulation level 250 VAC e Permiss range 47 Hz to 63 Hz 24 V to L1 Rated input current e Tested with 2800 VDC e at 230 V 0 5A Reliable isolation to DIN VDE 0106 e at120V 0 8 A Part 101 Inrush current at 25 C 77 F 20 A Bridging of power failures at 93 and or 187 V min 20 ms It at inrush current 2 2 A s e Repeat rate min 1s Rati Output Rating Efficiency 83 I Ouiputvoliage Power input 58 W e Rated value 24 VDC e Permiss range 24 V 5 proof Power losses typ 10 W against open circuit Diagnostics e Ramp up time max 2 5 s Yes green LED S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 5 Power Supply Modules 2 2 The PS 307 Power Supply Module 5 A Order Number 6ES7 307 1EA00 0AA0 Eigenschaften The PS 307 power supply module 5 A has the following salient features e Output current 5 A e Output voltage 24 VDC proof against short circuit and open circuit e Connection to single phase AC system input voltage 120 230 VAC 50 60 Hz e Safe electrical isolation to EN 60 950 e Can be used as load power supply 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules Wiring Schematic Figure 2 3 shows the wiring schematic of the PS 307 power supply module 5 A You will find a detailed technical description of the module on the following pages LED for 24 VDC output vo
189. ed to the bus e bus segments are to be operated non grounded on the bus or e the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded Table 7 1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment Baud Rate Max Cable Length of a Segment in m 9 6 to 187 5 1000 kbaud 500 kbaud 400 1 5 Mbaud 200 3 to 12 Mbaud 100 If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters e Upto 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series e The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Baud Rate Max Cable Length between 2 Nodes with RS 485 Repeaters in m 6ES7 972 O0AA00 0XA0 9 6 to 187 5 10000 kbaud 500 kbaud 4000 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 RS 485 Repeater Table 7 2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Baud Rate Max Cable Length between 2 Nodes with RS 485 Repeaters in m 6ES7 972 0AA00 0XA0 1 5 Mbaud 2000 3 to 12 Mbaud 1000 Design of the RS 485 Repeater Table 7 3 shows the RS 485 repeater Table 7 3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater Order Number 6ES7 972 0AA00 0XA0 Repeater Design No Function Connection for the RS 485 repea
190. egrees C and measured error is typically lt 0 1 25 degrees C S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 76 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Wire Break Check The wire break check is a module software function that is provided for the voltage measuring range 1 to 5 volts and the current range 4 to 20 mA With the measuring range 4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 volts and e activated wire break check the analog input module enters a wire break in the diagnostics if the process value falls below 3 6 mA 9 V If you have enabled the diagnostic interrupt during configuration the analog input module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt If no diagnostic interrupt has been enabled the illuminated SF display is the only indicator for the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program e non activated wire break check the analog input module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when the underflow limit has been reached Measuring Ranges for Voltage and Current Measurement Table 4 35 shows the voltage and current measuring ranges for the SM331 Al 8 x 16 Bit module Table 4 35 Measuring Ranges for Current and Voltage Measuring Description Measuring Method Selected Range Voltage You will find the digitized analog values in 5V Section 4 1 21 Table 4 4 and Table 4 6 in 1 to5V the voltage measuring range 10V Current You will find the digitized analog values in
191. emperature error referredto 0 005 K input range Linearity error referred to the 0 05 input range Repeat accuracy inthe steady 0 05 state at 25 C 77 F referred to the input range Rated load voltage L 24 VDC Galvanic isolation No Permiss potential difference between the inputs and 1 VDC Mana Ucm Current drawn e from the backplane bus max 55 mA e from load voltage L max 110 mA without load Module power losses typ 2 6 W Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts No Diagnostic functions No Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Measuring principle Successive approximation Resolution incl overrange 8 bits Conversion time all channels 5 ms S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 111 Analog Modules Sensor Selection Data Repeat accuracy inthe steady 0 05 state at 25 C 77 F referred to the output range Input ranges rated values input resistance e Voltage 0to10 V 100kQ Output ripple bandwidth 0 05 referred to the output range e Current 0 to 20 mA 50 Q Actuator Selection Data Permissible input voltage max 20 V destruction limit continuously 75 V for Output ranges rated values max 1 s duty factor e Voltage 0to10 V 1 20 e Current 0 to20 mA sear la a Impedance 1 nominal output P range Connection of signal sensors e with voltage output
192. ence of errors on the analog modules 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 56 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Influence of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the supply voltage of the analog module and on the operating state of the CPU Table 4 25 gives an overview of these dependencies Table 4 25 Dependencies of the Analog Input Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L CPU Operating State Supply Voltage L at Analog Module Input Value of the Analog Input Module Output Value of the Analog Output Module POWER RUN L present Process value CPU values ON 7FFFy until the 1st Until the 1st conversion conversion after switch on or after e after switch on configuration of the has been module has been completed a signal completed of 0 mA or 0 Vis output e after parameter assignment has been completed the previous value is output L missing Overflow value 0 mA 0 V POWER STOP L present Process value Substitute value last ON 7FFFy until the 1st valie conversion after 0 mA O V default switch on or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed L missing Overflow value 0 mA 0 V POWER L present 0 mA 0 V OFF L missing 0 mA 0 V Failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the SF
193. eristics 3 3 technical data 3 3 terminal connection diagram SM 322 DO 32 x 24VDC characteristics 3 3 technical data 3 3 terminal connection diagram 3 32 SM 322 DO 8 x 120 230VAC characteristics 3 5 technical data 3 5 terminal connection diagram 3 54 SM 322 DO 8 x 230VAC REL characteristics 3 62 technical data 3 64 terminal connection diagram 3 63 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 8 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC characteristics 3 47 technical data terminal connection diagram SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt auxiliary power ae 3 45 characteristics default setting diagnostics interrupt enable 3 43 diagnostics 3 44 diagnostics interrupt wire break 3 45 error causes substitute value substitute a value missing load voltage 3 43 fuse blown 3 45 short circuit to L 3 4 short circuit to M hold last value load voltage missing output Sona redundant 3 40 parameters 3 parameter zssonment 3 42 RAM error redundant Sith signals setting the parameters 3 42 short circuit to P technical data terminal connection diagram response with CPU STOP watchdog 3 45 SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230VAC characteristics 3 66 technical specifications terminal connection diagram SM 323 DI DO 16 x 24VDC characteristics technical data terminal connection diagram SM 323 DI DO 8 x 24V
194. errupt on positive edge L Yes Yes Process interrupt on negative edge Yes Yes Before you can enable the diagnostics interrupt in record 1 in the user program you must first enable the diagnostics in record 0 with STEP 7 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 A 3 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of Data Record 1 A 4 Figure A 1 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital input modules You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 7 6 O Bit no Byte 0 Diagnostics interrupt enable Process interrupt enable 76543210 Byte 1 Process interrupt on rising edge at channel group 0 on falling edge at channel group 0 on rising edge at channel group 1 on falling edge at channel group 1 on rising edge at channel group 2 on falling edge at channel group 2 on rising edge at channel group 3 on falling edge at channel group 3 76543210 Byte 2 Process interrupt on rising edge at channel group 4 on falling edge at channel group 4 on rising edge at channel group 5 on falling edge at channel group 5 on rising edge at channel group 6 on falling edge at channel group 6 on rising edge at channel group 7 on falling edge at channel group 7 Byte 3 Irrelevant Figure A
195. es Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Dimensions 40 x125 x 120mm Diagnostics W x H x D mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Status display Green LED per channel Weight approx 320 g niterrupts one 11 2 oz Diagnostics functions None Module Specific Data Actuator Selection Data Thermic permanent max 8A Number of output points 8 c rre t p Length of cable Short circuit proof with circuit breaker of characteristic B e Unshielded max 600m 654 yd to IEC 947 5 1 for e Shielded max 1000 m e cos 1 0 600A 1930 y9 e cos 0 5 0 7 900 A Voltages Currents Potentials Short circuit proof with fusible link Rated supply voltage for 24V DC relay L e Diazed8A 1000 A Current of the outputs Switching capacity and service life of contacts e horizontal installation for resistive load heating up to 30 C max 8 A Voltag Current No of up to 60 C max 5A e switching cycles e vertical installation max 5A typ up to 40 C 8 0 A 0 1 mill Galvanic isolation 24V DC 4 0 A 0 3 mill between channels and yes 2 0 A 0 7 mill backplane bus 0 5 A 4 0 mill between the channels yes 0 5 A 1 6 mill Permiss potential 60 V DC 0 2 A 1 6 mill cimorengas EET 120 V DC 8 0A 0Amil between Minternal an the supply voltage of 60 V AC A8 VAG 2 0 A ne mil the relays 8 0 A 0 1 mill between Minternal Or 250 V AC 60 V AC 2 0A 1 2 mill supply voltage of the 8 0A 0 1 mill relays and the outputs
196. es 0 00 00 eee Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 0 000 ee eeeee Codes for the Interference Frequency Suppression of the Analog Input Modules x i 3 0oc eu boi eo tudta ee ae pee Pee eee eee Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 00000ee Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules Codes of the Module Types 00 ccc eee ete e eee eee Accessories and Spare Parts 0c cece eect e eee ene a ON Ged o1 ow RR AO Uii N o 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specifications What are General Technical Specifications The general technical specifications include standards and test specifications which the S7 300 meets and fulfills and which were used during testing of the 7 300 Contents This chapter includes the following sections relating to the general technical specifications Section Conients Page 1 1 Standards and Approbations 1 2 1 2 Electromagnetic Compatibility of S7 300 Modules 1 3 Transport and Storage Conditions for S7 300 Modules and Backup Batteries 1 4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating 1 7 7 300s 1 5 Information on Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of 1 10 Protection 1 6 Rated Voltages of
197. es for the analog signals The cables Q and S and M and S respectively are to be twisted together The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at both cable ends If there are potential differences between the cable ends an equipotential bonding current which can flow over the shield can cause interference of the analog signals In such a case you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only Isolated Analog Output Modules With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and the M terminal of the CPU You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference Ujgo can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and the M terminal of the CPU Make sure that Uiso does not exceed the permissible value If it is possible that the permissible value is exceeded establish a connection between the Mana terminal and the M terminal of the CPU Non lsolated Analog Output Modules With the non isolated analog output modules you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and the M terminal of the CPU Therefore connect the Mana terminal with the M terminal of the CPU A potential difference between Mana and the M terminal of the CPU can lead toa corruption of the analog signal 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 34 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02
198. eters e are static or dynamic or e canbe set for the modules as a whole or for one channel each Table 4 20 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit and SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit Parame Scope Value Range Default ter Type Setting Enable e Diagnostics Yes no No Dynamic Module interrupt Diagnostics e Group Yes no No Static Channel diagnostics Response with LWH Hold last value CPU STOP ASS Outputs de energized Dynamic Channel Output e Output type Deactivated U Dynamic Channel Voltage Current e Output range For the settable measuring ranges of the output 10 V Dynamic Channel channels please refer to the individual module description Parameters of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 You cannot parameterize the analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit The measuring method for this module is set via the wiring see Sectio 4 10 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 50 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 3 5 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules Introduction This Section contains tables listing the diagnostic messages of the analog modules What does Diagnostics Mean Use diagnostics to find out if and which errors have occurred on analog processing When detecting an error the analog input modules supply signal value 7FFF independent of the parameter assignment
199. f 2 outputs R l l L 24 VD ated load voltage lig s e for redundant actuation of a Total current of the outputs load Possible only outputs per group e to increase power of the same group e horizontal installation Not possible up to 20 C 68 F max 4 A Actuation of digital input Possible up to 40 C 104 F max 3 A a bd 8050 TAOCE J Switching frequency upto ee e Resistive loads max 100 Hz e vertical installation A e Inductive loads up to 40 C 104 F max 2 A to IEC 947 5 1 DC 13 max 0 5 Hz Galvanic isolation e Lamp loads max 10 Hz e between channels and Yes Voltage limited on circuit L 48 V typ backplane bus interruption reduced internally between the channels Yes to in groups of 8 Short circuit protection of output Yes electronic Permiss potential differences e Response threshold 1 A typ between different circuits 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested with 500 VDC Current drawn e from backplane bus max 90 mA e from load voltage L max 200 mA without load Module power losses typ 6 6 W Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions Green LED per channel None None 3 34 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 2 2 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A Order No 6ES7 322 1BH01 0AA0 Characteristics The digital output mo
200. f switching cyc typ 24 VDC 20A 01 mill 24 VDC 10A 02mill 24 VDC 0 5 A 1 0 mill 120 VDC 0 2A 06 mill 48 VAC 15A 45mill 120 VAC 20A 4 omill 120 VAC 10A 45mil 120 VAC 05A 20mil e Inductive load to IEC 947 5 1 DC13 AC15 Voltage Current No of switching cyc typ 24 VDC 2 0 A 0 05 mill 24 VDC 1 0 A 0 1 mill 24 VDC 0 5 A 0 5 mill 60 VDC 0 5 A 0 1 mill 120 VDC 0 2 A 0 3 mill 48 VAC 1 5A 1 mill 60 VAC 1 5A 1 mill 120 VAC 2 0 A 0 7 mill 120 VAC 1 0 A 1 0 mill 120 VAC 0 5 A 1 5 mill e Lamp load max 50 W max size 5 to NEMA You will achieve a longer service life with an external suppressor circuit e Size of motor starter Paral connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load e to increase power Possible only outputs of the same group Not possible Actuation of a digital output Possible Switching frequency e Mechanical max 10 Hz e Resistive loads max 1 Hz e Inductive loads to IEC max 0 5 Hz 947 5 1 DC 13 AC 15 e Lamp loads max 1 Hz S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 61 Digital Modules 3 3 2 Relay Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL Order No 6ES7 322 1HF00 0AA0 Characteristics The relay output module SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL has the following salient features e 8 output points isolated in groups of 2 e Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC 48VAC to 230VAC e Suitable for AC DC solenoid val
201. for these inputs e Measuring range 1 to 5 V Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group e Current measurement 2 wire transducer There are two ways to use the channels Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel group If diagnostics is enabled the analog module triggers a diagnostics interrupt once and the group fault LED of the analog module flashes 2 e Provide a 1 5 to 3 3 kQ resistor on unused input You may then enable diagnostics for this channel group e Current measurement 4 to 20 mA 4 wire transducer Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group Measuring Range Module Some of the parameters of the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit can be assigned directly on the module with a measuring range module The analog input module is supplied with the measuring range module plugged in The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions A B C and D They are set to the B position in the factory Tables to 4 41 in Sectio ell you which setting you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range The settings for the various measuring ranges are also printed on the module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 85 Analog Modules Default Settings for Measuring Range Module In the individual mea
202. g Input Modules Measurement Code Measuring Range Code Type Deactivated 2 0000 Deactivated 2 0000 Voltage 2 0001 80 mV 2 0001 250 mV 2 0010 500 mV 2 0011 1V 2 0100 2 5V 2 0101 5V 2 0110 1to5V 2 0111 10V 2 1001 25 mV 2 1010 50 mV 2 1011 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 A 9 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 10 Table A 5 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules continued Measurement Code Measuring Range Code Type 4 wire transducer 2 0010 3 2 mA 2 0000 10 mA 2 0001 O0 to 20 mA 2 0010 4 to 20 mA 2 0011 20 mA 2 0100 5 mA 2 0101 2 wire transducer 2 0011 4 to 20 mA 2 0011 Resistor 4 wire 2 0100 150 Q 2 0010 connection 300 Q 2 0100 600 Q 2 0110 Resistor 4 wire 2 0110 52 to 148 Q 2 0001 connection 100 Q 250 Q 2 0011 compensation 400 Q 240101 700 Q 2 0111 Resistance type 2 1000 Pt 100 climate 2 0000 E line Ni 100 climate 2 0001 arization 4 wire connection Pt 100 standard range 2 0010 Pt 200 standard range 2 0011 Pt 500 standard range 2 0100 Pt 1000 standard range 2 0101 Ni 1000 standard range 2 0110 Pt 200 climate 2 0111 Pt 500 climate 2 1000 Pt 1000 climate 2 1001 Ni 1000 climate 2 1001 Ni 100 standard range 2 1011 Thermocouples 2 1010 Type B PtRh PtRh 2 0000 internal Type N NiCrSi NiSi 2 0001 aes Type E NiCr CuNi 2 0010 Thermocouples 2 101
203. g Range Module In the individual measuring range module positions you can use the following measuring methods and measuring ranges without re initializing the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit with STEP 7 Table 4 29 Default Settings of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Modules Measuring Range Measuring Method Measuring Range Module Setting A Voltage 1000 mV B Voltage 10V C Current 4 to 20 mA 4 wire transducer D Current 4 to 20 mA 2 wire transducer These measuring methods and measuring ranges are the default settings on the module You only have to insert the measuring range module to the required setting see Section 4 3 Special Feature of Process Interrupts You can set process interrupts in STEP 7 for the 1st and 2nd channel group Note that a process interrupt is set only for the 1st channel of the channel group i e for channel 0 or channel 2 respectively S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 4 3 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module SM 331 AIl 8 x 12 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods on the analog input module SM 331 Al8 x 12 Bit e Voltage measurement e Current measurement e Resistance measurement e Temperature measurement Use the S7 Configuration STEP 7 tool and the measuring range modules o
204. g z a conductor Ground bus Figure 4 4 Connecting Non lsolated Sensors to a Non lsolated Analog Input Module Do not use non isolated 2 wire transducers and non isolated resistance sensors 4 2 2 Using Thermocouples Introduction This section describes the design of thermocouples and what you must observe when connecting thermocouples S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 25 Analog Modules Design of Thermocouples A thermocouple consists of e the thermocouple proper sensor and e the necessary mounting and connecting parts The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends There are different types of thermocouple for example K J and N thermocouples depending on the composition of the material used The measuring principle of all thermocouple is the same irrespective of their type at eet Measuring junction TA Thermocouple with positive or See NS negative limbs Connecting point Compensating leads Sea Reference junction m Leads Im Trimming resistance Point at which thermo e m f is measured Figure 4 5 Design of Thermocouples Principle of Operation of Thermocouples If the measuring junction is exposed to a temperature other than that obtained at the free ends of the thermocouple point of connection a voltage or thermo e m f arises
205. ge Range Range Range 5V 10V 3 2mA 20mA Deci Hexa Range 10mA mal decimal 35 8794 gt 11 7589 gt 3 7628 gt 23 515 32767 7FFF Overflow 5 8794 11 7589 3 7628 23 515 32511 7EFF4 Overrange 5 0002 10 0004 3 2001 20 0007 27649 6CO1y l 500 10 00 3 200 20 000 27648 6C00H4 3 75 7 50 2 400 14 998 20736 51004 Nominal range 3 75 7 50 2 400 14 998 20736 AF004 5 00 10 00 3 200 20 000 27648 9400 5 0002 10 0004 3 2001 20 0007 27649 93FFy Underrange 5 8796 11 759 3 7629 23 546 32512 8100 lt 5 8796 lt 11 759 lt 3 7629 lt 23 516 32768 80004 __ Underflow S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Voltage and Current Measuring Ranges for the voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 V and for the current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Table 4 6 shows the representation of the digitized measured value Table 4 6 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Voltage and Current Measuring Ranges Measuring Range 1to5V 5 7036 5 0001 5 000 4 000 1 000 0 9999 0 2963 gt 5 7036 lt 0 2963 Measuring Range 020mA gt 23 515 23 515 20 0007 20 000 14 998 0 000 0 0007 3 5185 lt 3 5185 Measuring Range 4 to 20 mA gt 22 810 22 810 20 0005 20 000 16 000
206. gn the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User A 2 Program A 2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules A 3 A 3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules A 5 A 4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules A 7 A 5 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules A 11 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 A 1 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program Parameter Assignment in the User Program You have already set the parameters for the S7 300 modules using STEP 7 You can use an SFC in the user program to change the module parameters You can also use an SFC in the user program to transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module Parameters Stored in Data Records The parameters for the signal modules are stored in two data records records 0 and 1 Modifiable Parameters You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module using SFC 55 The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this You cannot change the S7 300 parameters of record 0 in the user program In the following sections we show you an overview of the parameters which are stored in records 0 and 1 for each module class SFCs for Parameter Assignment The following SFCs are available for assigning the parameters for the signal modules in the user program SFC Identifier Application No
207. grammable Controller Installation and Hardware S7 300 M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications ET 200M ET 200M Distributed I O Device S7 300 M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications CD ROM Note You can also order the complete SIMATIC S7 documentation on CD ROM How to Use this Manual To help you find special information quickly the manual contains the following access aids At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on each page of each chapter You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual The glossary contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you fast access to the information you need S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Preface Attributes of Technical Data Several values of the technical data are specified with attributes in the module data sheets These attributes for the values in the technical data mean Attribute minimum maximum Meaning A minimum maximum value represents a limit or operating value guaranteed by SIEMENS The minimum or maximum of this value must not be exceeded within other operating limit values during
208. hPa Corresponding to an altitude of 1000 to2000 m Concentration of contaminants SO lt 0 5 ppm relative humidity lt 60 no condensation HoS lt 0 1 ppm relative humidity lt 60 no condensation Test 10 ppm 4 days 1 ppm 4 days The ambient mechanical conditions for S7 300 modules are listed in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations Frequency Range Hz 10 lt f lt 58 Continuous 0 0375 mm amplitude Occasional 0 075 mm amplitude 58 lt f lt 150 0 5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specifications Reducing Vibrations If your S7 300 modules are exposed to severe shock and or vibrations you must take the appropriate measures to reduce the acceleration and or amplitude respectively We recommend that you install the rail on vibration damping material for example rubber metal antivibration mountings Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests for ambient mechanical conditions Test Vibrations Test Standard Vibration test to IEC 68 Parts 2 6 sinusoidal Remarks Type of oscillation Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave minute 10 Hz lt F lt 58 Hz constant amplitude
209. hannels are grouped in channel groups you must take into account the conversion time channel group by channel group Two analog input channels of the analog input modules SM 331 form one channel group You must therefore grade the cycle time in steps of 2 To reduce the cycle time you should use the parameter assignment in STEP 7 to deactivate any analog input channels that are not used Figure 4 16 illustrates the components of the cycle time for an n channel analog input module y N Conversion time channel 1 Y Conversion time channel 2 gt Cycle time Yy Conversion time channel n A Figure 4 16 Cycle Time of the Analog Input Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 3 2 Conversion Cycle Setting and Response Times of the Analog Output Channels Introduction This section contains the definition and interrelationships of the times relevant for the analog output modules Conversion Time The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital to analog conversion Cycle Time Conversion of the analog output channels is sequential This means that the analog output channel values are converted one after the other The cycle time that is the time elapsing before an analog output value is again
210. his also applies to configured inputs which are not used L 4 m M L M Isolated M ADC Lo sensors lt M gic Backplane Recommended T pus connection 7 Ll Mana CPU 2 JA Uiso Eo m es 2 IM al Ground bus Figure 4 1 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated Analog Input Module 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 22 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Figure 4 2 shows the principle of connecting isolated sensors to a non isolated analog input module L Z M M Isolated lt M sensors M ADC Logic lt M Backplane T bus Recommended connection M Lt ANA CPU Q e ao pater L Ground bus Figure 4 2 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non lsolated Analog Input Module Non Isolated Sensors The non isolated sensors are connected locally to ground potential Mana must be connected to ground potential Caused by local conditions or interferences potential differences U m static or dynamic can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points If the potential difference Ucn exceeds the permissible value you must provide equipotential
211. i Type L Fe CuNi Measuring Range Module Setting A Thermocouples linearization external compensation thermal e m f measurement The digitized analog values are listed in Section Tables to 4 15 under the temperature range Type N NiCrSi NiSi Type E NiCr CuNi Type J Fe CuNi Type K NiCr Ni Type L Fe CuNi Resistance type thermometer linearization 4 wire connection temperature measurement You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4 1 2 Tables 4 8 and 4 9 under the temperature range Pt 100 standard range climate range Ni 100 standard range climate range S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 69 Analog Modules 4 5 Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit Order No 6ES7 331 7NFO0 0ABO Characteristic Features The analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit has the following characteristic features e 8 inputs in 4 channel groups e Measured value resolution 15 Bit sign independent of integration time e Fast update mode for individually enabled channel groups 0 or 1 e Measurement mode selectable per channel group Voltage Current e Arbitrary measuring range and filter update rate selection per channel group e Programmable diagnostics e Programmable diagnostic interrupt e Two channels with limit monitoring e Programmable limit interrupt e Galvanic isolation to CPU e Pe
212. i e output channel 0 channel group 0 see Fig A 4 in Appendix A Unused Output Channels To make sure that unused output channels of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit are dead you must deactivate them and leave them open Deactivate an output channel using the Output parameter block when programming with STEP 7 see Section 4 3 4 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 94 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 7 3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit Analog Outputs You can use the outputs as e Voltage outputs e Current outputs Set the outputs group wise using STEP 7 for programming the output type Output Ranges Set the various output ranges for the voltage and or current outputs with STEP 7 Table 4 42 lists all the possible output ranges of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit Table 4 42 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit Selected Type of Output Description Output Range Voltage You will find the digital 1to5V analog values in 0to10V Section 4 1 3 jin the voltage 10V output range Current You will find the digital 0 to 20 mA analog values in 4to 20 mA Section 4 1 3 in the current 20 mA output range Default Setting The default settings of the module are output type voltage and output range 10 V You can use this output type with this output range with
213. ible closed circuit max 1 5 mA current Time Frequency Internal interrupt processing time without input delay for e interrupt processing only max 250 us e interrupt and diagnostics max 250 us processing Input delay e Configurable Yes e Rated value typ 0 1 0 5 3 15 20 ms Input frequency lt 2 kHz with 0 1 ms delay time S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 11 Digital Modules Setting the Parameters You set the parameters for the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts using STEP 7 Table 3 3 lindicates the digital module parameters that can be set You must enter the settings when the CPU is in the STOP state The parameters are transferred from the programming device to the CPU of the S7 300 and stored there The CPU transfers them to the digital module You can also change some of the parameters in the user program with the SFC 55 see Reference Manual System and Standard Functions According to the two alternative ways of setting the parameters they are divided into e Static parameters e Dynamic parameters Table 3 1 below describes the properties of the static and dynamic parameters Table 3 1 Static and Dynamic Parameters of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Parameter Settable with Operating State of the CPU Static Programming device STOP Dynamic Programming device S
214. ications Sinusoidal Interference High frequency radiation to the device in accordance with ENV 50140 corresponds to IEC 801 3 e Electromagnetic high frequency field amplitude modulated from 80 to 1000 MHz 10V m 80 AM 1 kHz e Electromagnetic high frequency field pulse modulated 900 5 MHz 10 V m 50 ED 200 Hz repetition frequency e High frequency interference on signal and data lines etc in accordance with ENV 50141 corresponds to IEC 801 6 high frequency asymmetrical amplitude modulated from 0 15 to 80 MHz 10 V effective value unmodulated 80 AM 1 kHz 150 source impedance Emission of Radio Interference Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011 Limit value class A Group 1 From 20 to 230 MHz lt 30 dB uV m Q From 230 to 1000 MHz lt 37 dB uV m Q Measured at a distance of 30 m 98 4 ft Interference emission via the mains AC power supply in accordance with EN 55011 Limit value class A Group 1 From 0 15 to 0 5 MHz lt 79 dB uV Q lt 66 dB uV M From 0 5 to 5 MHz lt 73 dB uV Q lt 60 dB uV M From 5 to 30 MHz lt 73 dB uV Q lt 60 dB uV M S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 1 5 General Technical Specifications 1 3 Transport and Storage Conditions for S7 300 Modules and
215. iency Power input Power losses with protective grounding conductor 250 VAC 2800 VDC to DIN VDE 0106 Part 101 min 20 ms minis 87 138 W typ 18 W Diagnostics e Permiss range e Ramp up time Output current e Rated value Short circuit protection Residual ripple e at 230V 1A e at120V 2A Inrush current at 25 C 77 F 45A I t at inrush current 4 32 A s Output Rating Output voltage e Rated value 24 VDC 24 V 5 proof against open circuit max 2 5 s 5A cannot be connected in parallel configurations Electronic nonlatching 1 1 to 1 3 x In max 150 MVpp LED for output voltage available Yes green LED 2 10 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules 2 3 The PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A Order Number 6ES7 307 1KA00 0AA0 Characteristics The PS 307 power supply module 10 A has the following salient features e Output current 10 A e Output voltage 24 VDC proof against short circuit and open circuit e Connection to single phase AC system input voltage 120 230 VAC 50 60 Hz e Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 e Can be used as load power supply S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 11 Power Supply Modules Wiring Schematic Figure 2 5 shows the wiring schematic of the PS 307 power supply module
216. ight Status Interrupts Diagnostics Dimensions WxHxD Weight 40 x 125 x 120 mm 1 56x4 88x4 68 in approx 250 g Module Specific Data Status display Green LED p channel Interrupts None Diagnostics functions None Number of output points Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded 16 max 600m 654 yd max 1000m 1090 yd Actuator Selection Data Voltages Currents Potentials Rated supply voltage of the relay L Number of outputs that can be driven simultaneously Total current of the outputs per group Galvanic isolation e between channels and backplane bus between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences e between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays e between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs between the outputs of different groups Insultation tested with e between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays e between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs between the outputs of different groups Current drawn e from backplane bus e from supply voltage L Module power losses 24 VDC 16 max 8A Yes Yes 75 VDC 60 VAC 120 VAC 250 VAC 500 VDC 1500 VAC 1500 VAC max 100 mA max 250 mA typ 4 5 W Thermic permanent max 2A current Switching capacity and service life of the contacts e Resistive load Voltage Current No o
217. igital input B 16 71 Analog input B 16 72 Digital output B 16 73 Analog output Further channel type available 0 no 1 yes 7 0 Number of diagnostics bits that Byte 5 the module outputs per channel 7 0 Byte 6 Number of channels of the same type in one module Byte 7 Channel error channel 0 channel group 0 Channel error channel 1 channel group 1 Channel error channel 6 channel group 6 Channel error channel 7 channel group 7 Figure B 3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data Byte 7 and Higher Channel Specific Error Bytes 7 to 15 of data record 1 contain the channel specific errors see Figures B 4 to B 7 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications B 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Analog Input Channel Figure B 4 shows the bit assignment of the diagnostics byte for an analog input channel of the SM 331 analog input modules see Sections 4 4 and 4 6 Section 4 3 5 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies 76543210 Configuration parameter error Common mode error P short circuit M short circuit Wire break Reference channel error Measuring range underflow Measuring range overflow Figure B 4 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input Channel of an SM 331 Analog Input Module Analog Output Channel
218. ignal Input current e at 1 signal Input delay e from 0 to 1 e from 1 to 0 Input characteristic Connection of 2 wire BEROs e Permissible closed circuit current 24 VDC 13 to 30 V 3to5V typ 7 mA 1 2 to 4 8 ms 1 2 to 4 8 ms To IEC 1131 type 2 Possible max 1 5 mA Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions Green LED per channel None None 3 8 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 1 3 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Order Number 6ES7 321 7BH00 0ABO Characteristics Use in The digital input module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts has the following salient features 16 input points isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and 2 3 4 wire BEROs proximity switches 2 short circuit proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each External redundant power supply possible for sensors Sensor supply Vs O K status LEDs Group fault LED Configurable diagnostics Configurable diagnostics interrupt Configurable process interrupt Settable input delays This I O modules can be used in the 7 300 centralized configuration with the CPU 312 IFM__ from 6ES7 312 5AC00 0AB revision level 5 313 from 6ES7 313 1
219. il meet your requirements Oi COP Ne se Please rate the quality of the graphics tables Additional comments S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01
220. ime separately for each channel Note You must set the same interference suppression for all channels of the SM 334 Table 4 49 Codes for Interference Suppression Interference Integration Time Code Suppression Frequency 60 Hz 16 7 ms 2 01 50 Hz 20 ms 2 10 Type of Measurement and Measuring Ranges Table 4 50 contains the measuring ranges of the SM 334 analog input output module The table shows the codes for the type of measurement and for the corresponding measuring range You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of record 1 according to the desired measuring range see Figure 4 30 Table 4 50 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Inputs Type of Code Measuring Range Code Measurement Bits 4 to 7 Bits 0 to 3 Deactivated 2 0000 Deactivated 2 0000 Voltage 240001 Oto 10V 2 1000 Resistance 2 0100 10 kQ 2 1001 4 wire connection Thermal 2 1000 Pt 100 climate 2 0000 resistance lin earization 4 wire connection S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 125 Analog Modules Note The simultaneous connection of the PT 100 and a resistance to channels 0 and 1 or to channels 2 and 3 is not permitted Reason common current source for both channels Output Type and Output Ranges Table 4 51 contains the output ranges of the SM 334 analog input output module The table shows the codes for th
221. ing the pins of components or printed conductors In this way the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices If you have to carry out measurements on a module you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts Use grounded measuring devices only 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications E 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 List of Abbreviations Abbreviation Description ADC Analog digital converter Al Analog input AO Analog output CPU Central processing unit of programmable controller DAC Digital analog converter DB Data block DI Digital input DO Digital output EMC Electromagnetic compatibility ESD Electrostatic sensitive device FB Function block IM Interface module IP Intelligent I O LS Leading sign M Ground connection MPI Multiple point interface OB Organization block OP Operator panel PG Programming device PLC Programmable controller PS Power supply SFC System function S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 F 1 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Glossary Analog Module Analog modules convert analog process variables for example temperature into digital values that can be processed in the CPU or they convert digital values into analog manipula
222. ings The analog input module has default settings for the integration time diagnostics interrupts etc see Table 4 19 These default settings apply if you have not re initialized the module with STEP 7 Channel Groups The two channels of the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit are combined to a channel group You can thus assign channel group parameters only to the two channels The analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit has a measuring range module for this channel group Resistance Measurement If you use the resistance measurement method the analog input module has only one channel The 2nd channel is used for current injection Ic The measured value is obtained by accessing the 1st channel The 2nd channel has the default carry value 7FFF S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 84 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Unused Input Channels You must short circuit unused channels of the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit and you should connect them to Mana In this way you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module Also deactivate the unused channels using STEP 7 see Section 4 3 4 in order to reduce the module s cycle time If you do not use the COMP input you must short circuit it also Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation you should note the following points
223. ion of the Address Assignment Switch 000 c ccc eee eee Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 0 cece Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 0 0 eee eee Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 2 2 2 0 0 cece eee 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Contents 7 1 8 1 8 2 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 A 2 A 3 B 1 B 2 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 C 1 C 2 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 C 11 C 12 C 13 C 14 C 15 C 16 C 17 C 18 C 19 C 20 C 21 RS 485 Repeater 0 00 cece teens Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater 0 cece eee SIMATIC TOP connect 0 000 cece eee eee Front Connector for 32 Channel Module 0 0eeeeeeee Terminal Block with Spring Loaded Connections 4 Principle of Spring Loaded Connections 0 eee eee Threading the Round Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector Plugging the Connecting Cable into the Terminal Block Wiring of a Digital Module with Terminal Block for 1 Conductor Initiators Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for 3 Conductor Initiators Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module 02 2 cere eee Allocation of Terminals on Analog Module to Terminals on TPA Connection Example 0 0 0 0 c cece eee eee TPA Terminal
224. ion of the CPU M Mana and ground potential which are required due to the potential connection of the analog module isolated non isolated are not shown This means that you must bear in mind and implement the remarks comprised in Section 4 2 1 Thermocouples with Compensating Box The thermocouples using a compensating box must be of the same type If the thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module or a group all have the same reference junction you must provide compensation as shown in Figure 4 6 Copper wire L ZO XX T i M M Thermocouples M ADC Lo lt e M gic Backplane l bus ems L M leads same i material as Comp COMP thermocouple Box 7 COMP_ Mana Figure 4 6 Connection of Thermocouples with External Compensating Box to an Isolated Analog Input Module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 29 Analog Modules Thermocouples without Compensating Box If you connect thermocouples direct to the inputs of the module or via compensating leads you can use internal temperature compensation Each channel group can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups L Ia CG M ADC __ Lo or M gic Backplane bus Compensating
225. irection of analog module gt Press down lightly on the release to loosen the shielding plate Terminal block Shielding plate Snap the shielding plate Shield support for terminal into place element and signal leads from the I Os Snap the shielding plate into place at the rear of the terminal block Figure 9 3 TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A In this Appendix This appendix briefly describes how to assign the parameters for signal modules in the STEP 7 user program You can assign the parameters for the signal modules in the user program instead of or as well as with the proogramming device in STEP 7 This appendix also contains the structure of the parameters for the various classes of signal modules Reference Literature In the System and Standard Functions Reference Manual you will find a comprehensive description of how to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program as well as a description of the SFCs used In M7 300 You can also use the M7 API to assign the parameters in the user program for M7 300 CPUs or FMs see the Manuals for M7 300 400 System Software Contents This appendix contains the parameter sets for the following classes of signal modules on the S7 300 Section Contents Page A 1 How to Assi
226. is effected since the MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG OP socket is connected internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater Grounded Operation of the RS 485 Repeater You must not remove the jumper at the top side of the RS 485 repeater if you wish to operate the RS 485 repeater in a grounded configuration Galvanic Isolation between Bus Segments Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other The PG OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1 Figure 7 1 shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater DC L m PE ms 2 2408969 o I Terminals for bus segment 1 PG OP interface J ON 2 i Galvanic SIEMENS RS 485 REPEATER Terminals for bus segment 2 Isolation A2B2A2B2 009 e I_B Figure 7 1 RS 485 Repeater Amplification of the Bus Signals The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the PG OP interface and the port for bus segment 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 7 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 RS 485 Repeater 7 2 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Table 7 4 shows the technical specifications of the RS 485 repeater Table 7 4 Technical Specifications of the R
227. iso PSE oct Vile Ground bus ale Figure 4 14 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated Analog Output Module over a 4 Wire Circuit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 37 Analog Modules 2 Wire Circuit Use terminals Qy and the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana to connect loads to a voltage output over a 2 wire circuit Figure 4 15 shows the principle of connecting loads to a voltage output of a non isolated analog output module over a 2 wire circuit i Backplane gic bus RL MANA CPU ct Q O Q L M Ground bus ali Figure 4 15 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non lsolated Analog Output Module over a 2 Wire Circuit 4 3 Fundamental Principles for the Use of Analog Modules In this Section In this section you will find information on e The fundamental terms of analog value processing e How to set the measuring ranges of the analog input channels e Which diagnostics means the individual analog modules offer e How to set the functions of the individual analog modules using which parameters e The behavior of the individual analog modules 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 38 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Mo
228. ital modules two jumpers are usually required for connecting the power supply You can wire the jumpers either in the front connector or in the terminal block In the front connector you must connect the two positive and the two negative connections The same applies if you wire the jumpers at the terminal block Note With the digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt the description on the terminal block does not match the description on the digital output group Figure 8 8 shows the wiring principle and the connection of the power supply nls a L 1 ee 2 s Hs es 7 2 8 9 2 10 _e 11 gt o 12 13 14 2 Seite 17 18 19 M 207 z IEA Front connector Dod d2030 ds0e07l Dodsd20a0s0sbed7l 0085565580 DOOOOASAEDS Jumper 1 i 4 7 a 26886668686 BE5H5O5665 a Terminal block a Terminal block l Jumper 2 Jumper 1 or jumper 2 required Figure 8 8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for 3 Conductor Initiators 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 8 18 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect 2A Modules Table 8 10 lists the connection notes for SIMATIC
229. itive Devices ESD E 2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons Charging Every person with a non conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be charged electrostatically Figure E 1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801 2 Voltage in kV kv 16 Synthetic material 15 14 N 2 Woo 13 SS Antistatic material 12 for example wood 11 S O or concrete 10 9 S 8 NS 7 6 N 5 TN WN Bo age se 3 N es Ak N 2 She SS 1 3 TS HH _ _ _ _ 4 gt 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8090100 Relative air humidity in Figure E 1 Electrostatic Voltages which can Build up on a Person S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 E 3 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD E 3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage Ensure Sufficient Grounding Make sure that the personnel working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices You thus avoid electrostatic charging Avoid Direct Contact You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable for example during maintenance work Hold modules without touch
230. its sign incl overrange unipolar measuring range bipolar measuring range e Noise frequency suppression fl in Hz Sigma Delta type Yes 16 7 20 2 5 16 7 20 10 140 220 260 35 55 65 10 16 7 20 5 15 15 15 15 15 sign sign sign 100 60 50 100 100 1220 305 100 15 15 sign 10 4 72 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Noise Suppression and Error Limits Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interference voltage suppression for F n x fl 1 f1 parameterized interference frequency e Common mode noise gt 100 dB Ucm lt 50 V e Series mode noise peak gt 90 dB value of noise signal lt nominal value of input range Cross talk between inputs gt 100 dB Typical error 25 C referred to input range e Voltage 0 05 e Current 0 05 Max full range error 0 to 60 C no common mode voltage referred to input range e Voltage 0 1 e Current 0 3 Max full range error with DC common mode voltage 0 to 60 C 50 VDC channel to channel referred to input range e Voltage 0 7 e Current 0 9 Repeatability 0 025 Referred to input range Interrupts e Limit interrupt e Diagnostics interrupt Programmable channels 0 and 2 Programmable Diagnostics functions Programmable e System fault display Red LED SF e Diag
231. l Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt 0 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 X24 VDCI2 A 2 hd crialatdandet bimhi EEEE Ee aae bebe Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO16 X 120 VAC Ay otc vrcb enw atifnn ged od BUN Peddie Bodine Eaa Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x AC 120 230 V 2 A oo cect kidek Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 32 120 VAC 1 0A 2 0c ccc eee Module View and Block Diagram of Relay Output Module SM 322 DO 16 120 VAG REL es coche ceene eee Cee ed abe phdealedeea seek es Module View and Block Diagram of Relay Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL 0 c cece eee ee Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8x Rel 230 VAC D A 0 occ eect rrena Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323 DI16 D0 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A 11 ccs Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Output Module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5A 21 ect eeeee S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 xi Contents xii 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21
232. lded max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L1 Number of input points that can be driven simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 60 C e Vertical installation up to 40 C Galvanic isolation e between channels and backplane bus e between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences e between Minternai and the inputs e between the inputs of different groups Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus Module power losses Yes Yes 230 VAC 500 VAC 1500 VAC max 29 mA typ 4 9 W Input voltage e Rated value e for 1 signal e for 0 signal e Frequency range Input current at 1 signal e for signal 1 120 V 60 Hz 230 V 50 Hz Input delay e from 0 to 1 e from 1 to 0 Input characteristic Connection of 2 wire BEROs e Permissible closed circuit current 120 230 VAC 79 to 264 V 0 to 40 V 47 to 63 Hz typ 6 5 mA typ 11 mA max 25 ms max 25 ms to IEC 1131 type 1 Possible max 2 mA Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions Green LED per channel None None S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 27 Digital Modules 3 1 7 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 32 x 120 VAC Order No 6ES7 321
233. le SM 332 AO 2 Wiring the terminal block SIMATIC TOP analog output module SM 332 AO 4 connect 8 13 Voltage measurement WR_DPARM SFC 56 analog input module SM 331 Al 2 WR_PARM SFC 55 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 Voltage sensor connection Z Approbations WwW Watchdog SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 10 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 To Siemens AG A amp D AS E 82 Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg From Your Name Your Title Company Name Street City Zip Code Country Phone Please check any industry that applies to you Automotive Chemical Electrical Machinery Food Instrument and Control Nonelectrical Machinery aru U G a aa Petrochemical Oodadgaddu da Pharmaceutical Plastic Pulp and Paper Textiles Transportation Other S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Remarks Form Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to Siemens Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 very good to 5 poor Do the contents meet your requirements Is
234. le Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 109 Analog Modules Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 4 28 shows the module view and the block diagram for the analog input output module SM 334 Al4 AO2 x 8 8 Bit You will find the detailed technical specifications of the analog input output module on the following page rs L o ge 24y z Internal Me Q MVo 5 Supply 3 Mo cho o 4 A Mlo 8 ADU gt A MV1 Se 6 4 M oO 2 o T CH1 3 5 7 MI dL o o A 1 o gt Bi se o me 8 o o v m gT 3 L fe ge M cHo FF z ot AH Mo 5 11 Q MV3 4 Logic and 47 WY M3 o backplane bus 3 o z interface 3 A Miz CH3 14 YY QV 2 DAU V Aan 2 E 4 D _ManacHo 3 Mana 16 A Qlo o o 17 QV 2 E 1 2 Mana ch 8 o MANA 19 A Qh 2 f 20 M_ M Figure 4 28 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit Important Information on Connecting the Module 4 110 The SM 334 Al4 AO2 x 8 8 Bit analog input output module is a non isolated module Note when connecting the SM 334 that the analog ground Mana which is terminal 15 or 18 is connected to
235. leads same material as thermocouple COMP COMP_ Mana Figure 4 7 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an Isolated Analog Input Module 4 30 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 2 3 Connecting Voltage and Current Sensors and Resistance TypeThermometers Abbreviations and Mnemonics The abbreviations and mnemonics used in Figures 4 8 through 4 11 have the following meanings Io4 Constant current lead positive Io Constant current lead negative M Measuring lead positive M Measuring lead negative Mana Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit M Ground terminal L Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage In addition to the following explanations the remarks in Section 4 2 1 labout the connection of sensors to analog inputs apply In the following figures the required connecting leads between the M connection of the CPU M Mana and ground potential which are required due to the potential connection of the analog module isolated non isolated are not shown This means that you must bear in mind and implement the remarks comprised in Section Connecting Voltage Sensors Figure 4 8 shows you how to connect voltage sensors to an isolated analog input module L M p M O M a M ADC 7 _ Lo O M ie a gic Backplane bus
236. les This chapter describes the technical specifications of the power supply modules of the S7 300 programmable controller In addition to the technical specifications this chapter describes the following Contents This chapter describes the following power supply modules Characteristics Wiring schematic Basic circuit diagram Line protection Reaction to atypical operating conditions Section Conients Page 2 1 Power supply module PS 307 2A 2 2 2 2 Power supply module PS 307 5A 2 6 2 3 Power supply module PS 307 10A 2 11 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 1 Power Supply Modules 2 1 The PS 307 Power Supply Module 2 A Order Number 6ES7 307 1BA00 0AA0 Characteristics The PS 307 power supply module 2 A has the following salient features e Output current 2 A e Output voltage 24 VDC proof against short circuit and open circuit e Connection to single phase AC system input voltage 120 230 VAC 50 60 Hz e Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 e Can be used as load power supply S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules Wiring Schematic Figure 2 1 shows the wiring schematic of the PS 307 power supply module 2 A You will find a detailed technical description of the module on the following pages LED for 24 VDC output voltage available
237. loaded contact The wire is gripped in position by the spring loaded contact Caution The spring loaded contact will be damaged if you insert the screwdriver into the opening for the cable Make sure that you insert the screwdriver only into the rectangular opening of the terminal block SIEMENS TP3 OQOQOOQOOCOOCH Opening for the cable to be connected OOOOOCOCOC Opening for the OOQOOOOCOOO screwdriver for pressing the spring loaded contact Figure 8 3 Terminal Block with Spring Loaded Connections S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 8 10 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect Principle of Spring Loaded Connections Figure 8 4 shows the principle of spring loaded connections S 1 Insert screwdriver a 2 t wire to the end stop into Inser the eye of the spring loaded connection 3 Remove screwdriver Wire is a clamped by contact x Figure 8 4 Principle of Spring Loaded Connections 8 5 Preparing the Connecting Cables Introduction In this section we will show you how you can preassemble the connecting cable yourself The maximum distance between the SIMATIC S7 and the terminal blocks can be 30 m Tools Required A crim
238. ltage available Voltage selector On Off switch for 24 VDC Terminals for system voltage and protective FSS Bae ojloj o 24 VDC 230V grounding nn conductor L1 N matt o H gt 7 Terminals for 2 OQ m 24 VDC output O JLH voltage _ IM _ Ly Strain relief assembly Figure 2 3 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 5 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 7 Power Supply Modules Basic Circuit Diagram Figure 2 4 is the basic circuit diagram of the PS 307 power supply module 5 A L1 L N M 24 VDC Vd Figure 2 4 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 5 A Line Protection We recommend that you install a miniature circuit breaker MCB for example Siemens 5SN1 series with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module 5 A e Rated current at 230 VAC 10 A e Tripping characteristic type B or C S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 8 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules Reaction to Atypical Operating Conditions Table 2 2 gives information on the reaction of the power supply m
239. m These priority classes include interrupts as for example process interrupts When an interrupt occurs the operating sys tem automatically calls a corresponding organization block where the user can program the reaction desired for example in an FB Interrupt Diagnostics Diagnostics Interrupt Interrupt Hardware Hardware Interrupt Isolated In the case of isolated input output modules the reference potentials of the con trol and load circuits are galvanically isolated from each other for example by optocouplers relay contacts or transformers The input output circuits can be connected to a common potential Measuring Range Module Measuring range modules are plugged onto the analog input module for adapta tion to various measuring ranges Module Parameters Module parameters are used to set the module reactions A difference is made between static and dynamic module parameters Non Isolated In the case of non isolated input output modules the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are electrically connected to each other Operating Mode The SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers have the following operating modes STOP RESTART RUN Parameters 1 Variable of a STEP 7 code block 2 Variable for setting the module reaction one or several per module Each module is supplied with a basic setting that can be changed by means of STEP7 Parameters can be gt Dynamic or Static 7 300 and
240. mit value Yes Yes Lower limit value Yes Yes Note Before you can enable the diagnostics interrupt in record 1 in the user program you must first enable the diagnostics in record 0 with STEP 7 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 A 7 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of Data Record 1 Figure A 3 shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital output modules You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to 1 7 6 2 O Bit no Byte 0 Cycle end interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Byte 1 Interference frequency WI KY NY suppression Channel group 0 Channel group 1 see Table A 4 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 7 4 3 0 Byte 2 Measurement channel group 0 Byte 3 Measurement channel group 1 Byte 4 Measurement channel group 2 Byte 5 Measurement channel group 3 i Measur Measuring ement range see Table A 5 type Byte 6 High byte Upper limit value channel group 0 Byte 7 Low byte gt channel 0 Byte 8 High byte Lower limit value channel group 0 Byte 9 Low byte gt channel 0 Byte 10 High byte lt Upper limit value channel group 1 Byte 11 Low byte f channel 2 Byte 12 High byte Lower limit value channel grou
241. n Characteristic linearization e Thermal resistance Pt 100 10MQ 10 kQ 10MQ Oto10V 100K 2 Max 20 V continuously 75 V for max 1s duty factor 1 20 Possible Possible Possible Possible Yes Pt 100 climate range 4 118 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Analog Value Generation for the Outputs Actuator Selection Data Resolution incl overcontrol 12 bits range Cycle time 85 ms all output channels Settling time e for resistive load 0 8 ms e for capacitive load 0 8 ms Injection of substitute values No Interference Suppression Error Limits for the Outputs Crosstalk between the outputs gt 88 dB Operational limit in the total 1 0 temperature range referred to the output range Basic error limit operational 0 85 error limit at 25 C referred to the output range Temperature error referred to 0 01 K the output range Linearity error referred to the 0 01 output range Repeat accuracy in the steady 0 01 state at 25 C referred to the output range Output ripple bandwidth O to50 0 1 kHz referred to the output range Output range rated value Impedance in rated output range e with voltage outputs with capacitive load Voltage output Short circuit protection e Short circuit current Destruction limit for voltages currents connec
242. n is assigned either to the individual channels or to the module as a whole Table 3 10 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt Diagnostics Message Scope of Diagnostics Configurable Short circuit to M Short circuit to P Wire break Channel Yes Load voltage missing External auxiliary power missing Internal auxiliary power missing Fuse blown Module No Watchdog timeout EPROM error RAM error Wire Break Detection Wire break detection is at a current of lt 1mA Diagnostics Message Read Out 3 44 You can read out the system diagnostics with STEP 7 Detailed diagnostics messages can be read out from the module in the user program with the SFC 59 see Appendix B and Reference Manual System and Standard Functions S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Error Causes and Error Correction In the following table the possible error causes conditions for error detection and measures for error correction are listed for the individual diagnostics messages Please note that the module must be configured so that it can detect the errors for which configurable diagnostics messages are output Table 3 11 Diagnostics Messages Error Causes and Error Correction Diagnostics Error Possible Error Cause Remedy Message Detec
243. n the analog input module to make the necessary settings see Section 4 3 4 Measuring Ranges Tables 4 30 to 4 33 list the measuring ranges you can use with the analog input module Use STEP 7 and the measuring range modules on the analog input module to select the desired measuring ranges see Section 4 3 4 Tables 4 30 to 4 33 also show the necessary settings of the measuring range modules Wire Break Check With the measuring range 4 to 20 mA and e activated wire break check the analog input module enters a wire break in the diagnostics if the current value falls below 3 6 mA If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration the analog input module additionally triggers a diagnostics interrupt If no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled the illuminated SF display is the only indicator for the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostics bytes in the user program e non activated wire break check the analog input module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when the underflow has been reached S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 67 Analog Modules Measuring Ranges for Voltage Measurements Table 4 30 shows all of the measuring ranges or the sensor type for voltage measurements as well as the relevant measuring range module settings Table 4 30 Measuring Ranges for Voltage Measurement external compensation thermovoltage measurement
244. na and the M terminal of the CPU or IM 153 Therefore connect the Mana terminal with the M terminal of the CPU or IM 153 A potential difference between Mana and the M terminal of the CPU or IM 153 can lead to a corruption of the analog signal S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 19 Analog Modules Connection of Sensors to Analog Inputs Only a limited potential difference Ucn common mode voltage may occur between the measuring lines M of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded you must take different actions depending on the potential connection of the sensors isolated non isolated These actions are described in this section When connecting resistance type sensors or 2 wire transducers for current measurement you cannot make the connection from M to Mana This also applies to inputs which are not used Abbreviations and Mnemonics The abbreviations and mnemonics used in Figures 4 1 to 4 4 have the following meanings M Measuring lead positive M Measuring lead negative Mana Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit M Ground terminal L Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ucm Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the Mana Measuring circuit Uliso Potential difference between Mana and M terminal of CPU S7 300 and M7 30
245. nal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 D0 32 x 120 VAC 1 0 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 57 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Diagnostics Dimensions 80x 125x120 mm Status display Yes green LED per WxHxD 3 15 x 4 88 x 4 68 in channel Weight approx 500 g Interrupts No 19 3 oz Diagnostics functions Yes Module Specific Data e Group fault display onthe Yes Number of output points 32 module fuse Length of cable Actuator Selection Data e Unshielded max 600 m 654 yd Output voltage e Shielded max 1000 m e At 1 signal L1 1 5V 1090 yd Output current Voltages Currents Potentials At 1 signal Rated load voltage L1 120 VAC Rated current 1A Min current 10mA Total current of the outputs per Permiss surge current max 10 A group per group with 2 half waves e Horizontal installation e At 0 signal up to 20 C 68 F A Residual current max 3 mA upto60 C 140 F Mee on ern max 3A Zero cross inhibit voltage Non zero cross outputs e Vertical installation up to 40 C 104 F Size of motor starter max size 4 to NEMA max 4A Output power Galvanic isolation h P ee SAN amp loa max e To backplane bus Yes p e Between the channels Yes Parallel connection of in groups of 8 2 outputs e For logic operations Possible only outputs Permiss potential cifferen es o
246. nal Modules Standardization Standardization allows you to choose whether e trailing irrelevant bits remain in the encoder value or e these bits are excluded Note If you are using an absolute position encoder that transmits additional information in the trailing bits see the manufacturer s information and you want to evaluate this information you must take this into account at standardization by specifying the positions You will find more information in the online help system and Sec tion 5 3 41 Example Standardization You are using a single turn encoder with 29 steps 512 steps per revolution resolution 360 with the following parameterization e Encoder type 13 bit e Standardization 4 positions Before standardization cyclically captured encoder value 100 31 Data double word 0 0 0 0 0 O O 0 O O Oj Of Of O OF OO O 0 OJ O10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X Relevant bits Transmitted bits After standardization encoder value 100 31 Data double word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 Oj O O O 0 O Oj O Of 0 OF O O 0 1 1 0 0 1100 Relevant bits Result Bits 0 to 3 4 positions marked x are excluded S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 1
247. nal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital input module SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230 VAC You will find the detailed technical specifications of the SM 321 DI8 x 120 230 VAC on the following page 1 IN P Kees a J o HEF 4 5 E M 4 Pa A 1 f 3 aL 7 2 oO D qe DERZ O 9 Q J 3 10 N z al M Backplane bus interface N 2 VR Woe qie f AE K aol oa s M 7 45 Se 1 4 5 als 17 6 a 5 i DEST re 19 Q o L 20 N M Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 7 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230 VAC S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 26 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 120mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in approx 240 g 8 4 oz Module Specific Data Number of input points Length of cable e Unshielded e Shie
248. nd Yes backplane bus between the channels No Permiss potential differences e between different circuits 75 VDC 60 VAC Insulation tested with 500 VDC Current drawn e from backplane bus max 10 mA e from load voltage L Module power losses typ 3 5 W Status Interrupts Diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Interrupts None Diagnostics functions None S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 21 Digital Modules 3 1 5 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 120 VAC Order No 6ES7 321 1EH01 0AA0 Characteristics The digital input module SM 321 DI 16 x 120 VAC has the following salient features e 16 input points isolated in groups of 4 e 120 VAC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and 2 3 wire AC proximity switches 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 22 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 6 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital input module SM 321 DI 16 x 120 VAC You will find the detailed technical specifications of the SM 321 DI 16 x 120 VAC on the following page
249. ng with STEP 7 and field wiring terminals should be empty S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 107 Analog Modules 4 9 2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4x 16 Bit Analog Outputs You can use the outputs as e Voltage outputs e Current outputs Set the outputs as groups using STEP 7 for programming the output type Output Ranges Set the various output ranges for the voltage and or current outputs with STEP 7 Table 4 35 lists the possible output ranges of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit Table 4 44 Ranges for Current and Voltage Outputs Selected Type DA Output Description of Output wii Range Voltage You will find the digital analog values in 1to5V Table 4 17 in the voltage output range 0 to 10V 10V Current You will find the digital analog values in 0 to 20 mA Table 4 181 in the current output range 4 to 20 mA 20 mA 1 of the S7 300 Installation and Hardware manual Reaction to CPU STOP You can configure the SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows Outputs Without Voltage or Current OWVC Retain Last Value RLV or Switch to Substitute Value SSV Substitute Values Substitute values expressed as a current mA or voltage V must be within the nominal range of the channel configuration S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 108 EWA 4N
250. nostic interrupt One channel with limit monitoring Programmable limit interrupt Galvanic isolation to CPU Galvanic isolation to load voltage not for 2 wire transducer The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time selected In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be see technical specifications of analog input module and Table 4 3 4 80 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 4 24 shows the terminal connection diagram and the block diagram of the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected see Technical Specifications You will find the detailed technical specifications of the analog input module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit on the following page Thermocouples Resistance Voltage measurement measurement Fault LEDs red Current measurement 1 L 24V cj SF Internal Current Multi Meas range 2 Mo CHO Mo CHO o
251. nostics information Possible read out Sensor Selection Data Input ranges rated values input resistance e Voltage 5V 2MQ 1to5V 2M9 10V ee Current O0to20mA 2502 Permissible input voltage for voltage input Destruction limit Permissible input current for current input destruction limit 20 mA 1 250 Q 4 to 20 mA 1 250 Q max 50 V RMS continuous 120 V RMS common mode or series mode max 32 mA continuous all points S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 73 Analog Modules 4 5 1 Starting Up the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit Parameter Assignment The analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit is set e With STEP 7 see the STEP 7 User Manual or e Inthe user program by means of SFCs see the STEP 7 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual Default Setting The analog input module has default settings for the integration time diagnostics interrupts etc The default settings are 10V measuring mode 20 ms integration time no diagnostics and no interrupts Channel Groups The channels of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit are arranged in four groups of two You must assign the same parameters to both channels in each group Table 4 28 shows which channels of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit are configured as one channel group You will need the channel group numbers to
252. nt max DC 50 mA Connection of actuators e Voltage output 2 wire connection Possible 4 wire connection Possible measuring leads e Current output 2 wire connection Possible 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 100 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 8 2 Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit Parameter Assignment The functions of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit are set as follows e with STEP 7 see aso STEP 7 User Manual or e inthe user program by means of SFCs see STEP 7 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit is in operation intermediate values may appear at the output Default Settings The analog output module has default settings for the type of output diagnostics interrupts etc see Table 4 20 These default settings are valid if you have not re initialized the module with STEP 7 Parameter Assignment You can configure each output channel of the SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit individually Advantage You can assign individual parameters for each output channel When you configure with SFCs in the user program the parameters are assigned to channel groups Each output channel of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit is then assigned to one channel group i e output channel 0 channel group 0 see Fig A 3 in Appendix
253. nters S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 31 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 9 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital output module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A on the following page ILH 1 21 5 3 24V SL 24V 2 k a 22 o o a EEPE JEP E a 11h 2 i I IAA 2h o 2 2 f a ee TERET melas oj 3 3 fo et Mg die Yr rk BH 4 2 a oj 4 4 fo Si o a 7 ae o 5 z1 M M 27 o o ge 1s te E iy 8 28 o 6 6 fo rer se Backplane bus alte 3 7 7 i of AS interface Z o 1M 10 30 3M o o o o 24V ca x n x T 24V 3 0 0 f pa
254. nversion 72 85 time for temperature measurement in ms e Resolution in bits incl 12 12 overcontrol range unipolar measuring range 12 12 bipolar measuring range Sign Sign 60 50 e Interference suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 4 117 Analog Modules Interference Suppression Error Limits for the Inputs Sensor Selection Data Interference suppression for f n x f1 1 f1 interference frequency Common mode interference Uss lt 1 V e Series mode interference peak value of interference lt rated value of input range Crosstalk between the inputs Operational limit in the total temperature range referred to the input range e Pt100 e Otol0V e 10kQ Basic error limit operational limit at 25 C referred to the input range e Pt100 e Otol0V e 10kQ Temperature error referred to the input range Linearity error referred to the input range Repeat accuracy in the steady state at 25 C referred to the input range gt 38 dB gt 36 dB gt 88 dB 0 7 0 7 3 0 0 5 0 5 2 0 0 01 K t 0 05 t 0 05 Input ranges rated values input resistance e Resistance thermometer e Resistance e Voltage Permissible input voltage destruction limit Connection of signal sensors e For voltage measurement e For resistance measurement with 2 wire connection with 3 wire connection with 4 wire connectio
255. o 60 VAC Interrupts e Isolation tested with 600 VDC e Diagnostics alarm Programmable Current drawn Diagnostics functions Programmable e from backplane max 60 mA e System fault display on Red LED SF from load voltage L max 135 mA module without load e Diagnostics information Possible Power losses of the module typ 3 W read g l Analog Value Generation Resolution incl overrange e 10 V 20 mA 11 bits sign 4 to 20 mA 1 to 5V e Oto 10 V 0 to 20 mA 12 bits Conversion time per channel max 0 8 ms Setting time e for resistive load 0 1 ms e for capacitive load 3 3 ms e for inductive load 0 5 ms Injection of substitute values Yes programmable S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 99 Analog Modules Actuator Selection Data Output ranges nominal values e Voltage 10V O0to10V 1to5V e Current 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Impedance in nominal output range e with voltage outputs min 1k Q capacitive load max 1 uF e with current outputs max 500 Q atUcm lt 1V max 600 Q inductive load max 10 mH Voltage output e Short circuit protection Yes e Short circuit current max 25 mA Current output e Open circuit voltage max 18 V Destruction limit for voltages currents connected from outside e Voltage at outputs to Mana max 18 V continuously 75 V for max 1 s duty factor 1 20 e Curre
256. odule are both addressed as of the initial module address You determine the input address and output address during configuration of the SM 338 Read about this in the online help system Input Addresses Encoder Input Input Address from Configuration Address Offset gt Initial module address 1 Initial module address 4 bytes address offset 2 Initial module address 8 bytes address offset Structure of the Data Double Word The data double word is structured as follows at each encoder input a a Encoder value in gray code or binary code Freeze 0 encoder value is not frozen The value is continuously updated 1 encoder value is frozen The value remains the same until acknowledgment Output Address Initial module address o Acknowledgment of the freeze function Bit 0 encoder input 0 Bit 1 encoder input 1 Bit 2 encoder input 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 14 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules 5 3 6 Group Error LED SF Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338 In the event of a diagnostic interrupt the SM 338 makes information available to the user in the diagnostic area The area is subdivided into diagnostic data part 1 module diagnosis bytes 0 to 3 and part 2 channel diagnosis bytes
257. odule out of Analog Input Module SM 331 Al8 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 45 Analog Modules 2 Insert the measuring range module correctly positioned into the analog input module Figure 4 21 Inserting a Measuring Range Module into Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit Follow the same procedure for all other measuring range modules Position of the Measuring Range Modules The measuring range modules have the following possible positions A B C and D Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual types of measurement and measuring ranges is described under the description of the analog module The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also printed on the analog module 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 46 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 3 4 Parameters of the Analog Modules Introduction This section contains a summary of the analog modules and their parameters Parameter Assignment Use STEP 7 to assign the parameters to the analog modules You must carry out this setting in the STOP mode of the CPU On a transition from STOP to RUN mode the CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules Alternatively you can also change some of the parameters in the user program with SFC 55
258. odule to atypical operating conditions Table 2 2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 5 A to Atypical Operating Conditions If Then 24 VDC LED the output circuit is overloaded Flashes e gt 6 5 A dynamic Voltage dip automatic voltage recovery e 5A lt I lt s 6 5A steady Voltage drop shortening of service life state the output is short circuited Output voltage 0 V automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been Dark eliminated an overvoltage occurs on the Possible destruction primary side there is an undervoltage on the Automatic disconnection automatic voltage Dark primary side recovery S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 2 9 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the PS 307 power supply module 5 A are listed below Dimensions and Weight Other Parameters Dimensions W x H x D 80 x 125 x 120 mm 3 12 x 4 88 x 4 68 in System frequency e Rated value e Permiss range Rated input current Weight approx 740 g 25 9 oz Input Rating Input voltage e Rated value 120 V 230 VAC 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz Protection class to IEC 536 DIN VDE 0106 Part 1 Insulation e Rated insulation level 24 V to L1 e Tested with Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures at 93 and or 187 V e Repeat rate Effic
259. odules see Table 1 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specifications Modules Table 1 2 lists all modules which satisfy the extended environmental conditions The Order No of the corresponding standard module has additionally been included in the Table as a configuring aid Refer to these standard modules for a detailed description and technical specifications Table 1 2 Modules for extended environmental conditions Module IM 153 1 IM 153 2 FO SIMATIC outdoor module for use under extended environmental conditions Standard modules as of order no 6ES7 153 1AA82 0XBO 6ES7 153 2AB80 0XB0 6ES7 153 1AA02 0XB0 6ES7 153 2AB00 0XBO CPU 315 2 DP CPU 312 CPU 314 CPU 314 IFM 6ES7 315 2AF82 0AB0 6ES7 312 5AC81 0AB0 6ES7 314 1AE83 0AB0 6ES7 314 5AE83 0AB0 6ES7 315 2AF02 0AB0O 6ES7 312 5AC01 0ABO 6ES7 314 1AE03 0AB0 6ES7 314 5AE03 0AB0 IM 365 6ES7 365 0BA81 0AA0 6ES7 365 0BA01 0AA0 SM 321 digital input module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230 VAC 6ES7 321 1BH81 0AA0 6ES7 321 1BL80 0AA0 6ES7 321 7BH80 0AA0 6ES7 321 1FF81 0AA0 6ES7 321 1BH01 0AAO 6ES7 321 1BL00 0AA0 6ES7 321 7BH00 0ABO 6ES7 321 1FF01 0OABO SM 322 digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5 A SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC
260. og input module A 7 AT Measurement type analog input module Measuring method analog input channels 4 43 analog input module SM 331 Al 2 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 analog input output module SM 334 Measuring range module 4 43 analog input module SM 331 Al 2 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 Measuring range overflow analog input module Measuring range underflow analog input module Measurement type analog input module Measuring range analog input channels 4 43 analog input module SM 331 Al 2 4 87 analog input module SM 331 Al 8 analog input module of the analog inputs SM 334 14 15 Measurement analog input module Module transport and storage conditions 1 6 Module parameters Glossary N Standards 1 2 O Operating conditions Output range analog output module analog output module SM 332 AO 4 4 95 4 95 Output type analog input output module SM 334 4 113 analog output module P Parameters analog input output module analog module analog output module analog input module Parameter assignment error analog input module analog output module Parameter block diagnostics 4 52 Parameter sets for signal modules A 1 Parameters analog input module A 7 analog output modules data records digital input modules digital output module modules SM 321 D 4VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interr
261. olf an py 3 a 1 1p See lk gt KH aaa o 2 2 fe Jol4 W n o E a Ja yE 2 lb ee Wium mE ee 16 36 oj 4 4 f axe OS SL ee ee o 5 5 i a helt ie rat 7 D d ea 38 oj 6 6 Sia e eee 3 7 7 D T p 2M 20 Ye 4M 40 4M O Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 9 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 32 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses Output byte x Poy Output byte x 2 Output byte x 1 Output byte x 3 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 33 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 mm Output voltage 1 56 x 4 88 x e at 1 signal min L 0 8 V 4 68 in Weigh B86 Output current eignt Approx g eat 1 signal Module Specific Data Rated value O 5A Number of output points 32 Pormiss wange S MAIO 0GA e at signal 0 Length of cable Residual current max 0 5 mA e Unshielded max 600 m 654 yd Load impedance 48 Q to 4 kQ e Shielded max 1000 m 1090 yd Lamp load max 5 W Voltages Currents Potentials Parallel connection o
262. oltage output Figure 4 29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 116 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Diagnostics Dimensions W x H xD mm Weight 40 x 125 x 120 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Approx 200 g Interrupts Diagnostic functions No No Module Specific Data Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Number of inputs 4 Number of outputs 2 Cable length shielded Max 100 m Voltages Currents Potential Rated load voltage L 24V DC e Polarity protection Yes Power supply to the transducers e Short circuit proof Yes e Constant current Resistance Typ 400 uA measurement Galvanic isolation e Between channels and Yes backplane bus Between channels and load yes voltage L Permiss potential difference Between the inputs and Mana Ucm 1V Between Mana and 75 V DC Minternat Uiso 60 VAC Current drawn e From the backplane bus Max 60 mA e From load voltage L Max 80 mA without load Module power losses Typ 2W S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Measuring principle Integrating Integration conversion time per channel e Configurable Yes e Integration time in ms 162 3 20 e Basic conversion time incl 72 85 integration time in ms Additional co
263. on collar 11 mm End ferrules toDIN 46228 e without insulation collar e with insulation collar 0 25 to 1 0 mm2 Model A up to 12 mm long Model E up to 12 mm Model A up to 12 mm long Model E up to 12 mm Model A 5 to 7 mm long long long 1 5 mm Model E 12 mm long Model E 18 mm long Blade width of 3 5 mm cylindrical model screwdriver Tightening torque for connecting the conductors not for spring loaded conductors 0 4 to 0 7 Nm S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 9 SIMATIC TOP connect 8 4 Screw Type Connections or Spring Loaded Connections Screw Type or Spring Loaded Connections You can choose between two methods for connecting the signal lines to the terminal block and the power cables to the terminal block or front connector e Screw type connection or e Spring loaded connection Wiring with Spring Loaded Connections Wiring with spring loaded connection enables fast and easy connection of the signal lines and power cables You connect the cables as follows to the spring loaded contacts see Figure 8 3 1 Use a screwdriver to press the spring loaded contact in the rectangular opening down and hold it pressed in this position see Figure 8 4 2 Insert the wire A into the round opening of the relevant spring loaded contact 3 Release the pressure of the screwdriver A on the spring
264. on diagram Figure 3 8 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 32 x 120 VAC S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 29 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Status Interrupts Diagnostics Dimensions W x Hx D 40125120 mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions Yes green LED per channel No No Weight approx 300 g 10 6 oz Module Specific Data Number of input points 32 Length of cable Sensor Selection Data e Unshielded max 600 m 654 yd e Shielded max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated input voltage L1 120 VAC Number of input points that can be driven simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 60 C 140 F 24 e Horizontal or vertical 32 installation up to 40 C 104 F Galvanic isolation e To backplane bus Between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences Between N terminals of the groups Between the input N terminal and central grounding point e Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus Module power losses Yes optocoupler Yes 8 250 VAC 1500 VAC 1500 VAC max 16 mA typ 4 W Input voltage e Rated value e Frequency e For 1 signal e For 0 signal Input current e At 1 signal Input delay e Programma
265. on limit Connection of sensors e for voltage measurement e for current measurement as 2 wire transducers as 4 wire transducers e for resistance measurement 2 wire connection 3 wire connection 4 wire connection e Impedance of 2 wire transducer Characteristic linearization e for thermocouples e for resistance type thermometers Temperature compensation e Internal temperature compensation e External temperature compensation with compensating box e External temperature compensation with Pt 100 150 Q 10 MQ 300 Q 10 MQ 600 Q 10 MQ Types E N 10MQ J K L Pt 100 10 MQ Ni 100 max 20 V continuously 75 V for max 1 s duty factor 1 20 40 mA Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible max 820 Q Programmable e Types E N J K L e Pt 100 standard climate range Ni 100 standard climate range Programmable Possible Possible Not possible S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 83 Analog Modules 4 6 2 Starting Up the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit Parameter Assignment You make the necessary settings of the analog input module SM 331 Al2 x 12 Bit e by means of measuring range module on the module and e with STEP 7 see also the STEP 7 User Manual or e inthe user program by means of SFCs see STEP 7 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual Default Sett
266. on of the Module Data reference manual e new is Chapter 1 7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules for use under extended environmental conditions e newis Chapter 9 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA e the following signal modules have been added Note SM 321 DI 32 x 120 VAC SM 322 DO 32 x 120 VAC 1 0 A SM 322 DO 8 x Rel 230 VAC 5 A SM 331 AI 8 x 16 Bit SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 12 Bit SM 338 POS input module You can recognize the previous version of this Module Data reference manual by the number EWA 4NEB 710 6067 0x in the footer The current number is EWA 4NEB 710 6067 0x 01 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 IlI Preface Standards and Approvals The S7 300 fulfills the requirements and criteria of the IEC 1131 Part 2 The 7 300 fulfills the requirements for CE marking The approbations for CSA UL and FM are available for the S7 300 Details on the approbations and standards are given in Section 1 11 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Preface Scope of the Documentation Package This manual forms part of the documentation for the S7 300 M7 300 and ET 200M System Documentation Package 7 300 S7 300 Programmable Controller Installation and Hardware S7 300 M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications S7 300 Instruction List M7 300 M7 300 Pro
267. on of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type K In the case of incorrect wiring e g polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range e g incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module signals Temperature Units j g Decimal Hexa yP decimal gt 1622 32767 7FFFyY 1622 16220 3FSCy 1373 13730 35A2y 1372 13720 3598H 270 2700 F574y lt 270 lt 2700 lt F574y underflow below FOC5y and outputs 8000p Range Overflow Overrange Nominal range Underrange 4 12 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Temperature Range Type N Table 4 13 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the temperature range sensor type N Table 4 13 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type N In the case of incorrect wiring e g polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range e g incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module signals Temperature Units Range in C Type N Decimal Hexadecimal gt 1550 32767 7C8Cy 1550 15500 3C8Cy 1301 13010 32D2y 1300 13000 32C8y 270 2700 F574y lt 270 lt 2700 lt F574y underflow below FOC5y and outputs 8000p Range Overflow Overrange Nominal range Underrange Temperature R
268. ons EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 5 7 Other Signal Modules 5 3 1 Connection Diagram Wiring Rules e The ground of the encoder supply must be connected to the ground of the CPU non isolated In other words pin 2 M of the SM 338 must be connected to the ground of the CPU with low impedance e The encoder lines pins 3 to 14 must be shielded twisted pair cables The shield must be supported at both ends To support the shield at the SM 338 use the shield supporting element order number 6ES7 390 5AA00 0AA0 e If you exceed the maximum output current 900 mA of the encoder supply you must connect an external power supply Connection Diagram Connection to Fault indicator red the ground of f the CPU Voltage monitor Short circuit 1 L 24V SF protection is 2 M ma o a 2 3 9D data p gt 2 l l 4 OD data a g sly Nes OC clock 5 gt 6 yo OT clock Q E F i 1D data D ale 2 8 1D data z A gt 91 Ysg 1C clock o Logic cir cuitry so 0 1C clock __ 11 7 2D data
269. ore check whether the measuring range modules have to be set to another measuring method and measuring range The assignment of measuring range modules to measuring ranges is described in connection with the particular analog module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 43 Analog Modules Markings for the Measuring Range Module When unplugging and plugging in the measuring range module please note the markings on the analog input module Figure 4 19 shows you the position of the measuring range module relative to the marking on the analog input module Markings on the Marking on the measuring range analog module module Figure 4 19 Markings for the Measuring Range Module 4 44 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Resetting the Measuring Range Module If you have to reset a measuring range module proceed as follows example analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit 1 Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input module with a single lift Note Make sure that you do not insert the screwdriver in the latching window of the measuring range module if you require more than one lift to ease the measuring range module out You might thus damage its contacts Figure 4 20 Easing a Measuring Range M
270. ostics Use STEP 7 to set the diagnostics parameters Diagnostics Evaluation For the diagnostics evaluation a distinction has to be made between configurable and non configurable diagnostics messages In the event of a configurable diagnostics message for example M short circuit the diagnostics message is output only if diagnostics evaluation has been enabled in parameter diagnostics short circuit to M In the event of a non configurable diagnostics message the diagnostics message is always output irrepespective of the parameter settings S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 43 Digital Modules SF LED Output of a diagnostics message triggers a diagnostics interrupt only if the diagnostics interrupt has been enabled in the relevant parameter Irrespective of the parameter configuration the group fault SF LED or the relevant channel error LED will light up if module errors have been detected independent of the operating state of the CPU POWER ON Exception A wire break only results in the group error LED or relevant channel error LED lighting up if the parameters have been set accordingly Diagnostics of Digital Ouput Module Table 3 10 provides you with an overview of the diagnostics messages of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt You enable the diagnostics parameters in STEP 7 see Table 3 9 The diagnostics informatio
271. ostics diagnostics interrupt enable A 7 limit value A 7 limit value interrupt enable A 7 measurement t pe A 7 parameters range A 7 reset time A 7 wire break A 7 Analog input module SM 331 Al 2 channel groups characteristics current measurement 4 88 default setting 4 84 measured value resolution 4 80 measuring methods measuring range module measuring ranges parameter assignment resistance measurement start up 4 84 technical specifications temperature measurement terminal connection diagram voltage measurement Analog module dependencies diagnostics diagnostics interrupt dimension drawing parameters process interrupt Analog output connecting loads actuators 4 34 output ranges 4 16 Analog output channel conversion time response time settling time Analog output module diagnostics A 11 diagnostics interrupt enable A 11 output range output type substitute value S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index 1 Index Analog output module SM 332 AO 2 4 96 characteristics current output default settings output range 4 102 short circuit check start up 4 101 technical specifications terminal connection diagram voltage output wire break check Analog output modules parameters Analog signal cables for 4 19 Analog value conversion dta resolution
272. out changing the parameters of the SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit with STEP 7 Wire Break Check The analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit carries out a wire break check only for current outputs Short Circuit Check The analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit carries out a short circuit check only for voltage outputs S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 95 Analog Modules Substitute Values You can configure the SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows Output Substitute Values default 0 mA O V or Hold Last Value For the output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must set the substitute value E500 in order for the output to remain de energized see Tables 4 17 and 4 18 4 8 Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit In this Section In this section you will find e The characteristic features of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit e The technical specifications of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit You will learn e How to start up the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit e Which output ranges you can use with the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit e The parameters with which you can influence the characteristic features of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 96 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 8 1 Charac
273. out cuttings 8 1 Application Areas and Components of SIMATIC TOP Connect Application Areas SIMATIC TOP connect is used for wiring the following digital modules With SIMATIC TOP connect SIEMENS TP3 QOOOOCOOO You can Wire the Following Digital Modules SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC SM 321 DI 16x 24 VDC SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC source input SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5 A SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5A SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 2 A SM 323 DI 16 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A 8 2 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 SIMATIC TOP connect SIMATIC TOP Connect and its Components A SIMATIC TOP connect always consists of a front connector module with a flat ribbon connection A and one or more terminal blocks A The front connector and the terminal block are linked via a connecting cable A This cable may be up to 30 m long Figure 8 1 SIMATIC TOP connect S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 3 SIMATIC TOP connect Components Table 8 1 lists all components of SIMATIC TOP connect Table 8 1 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect
274. p 1 Byte 13 Low byte channel 2 Note Only one limit value is set for each 1st channel in a channel group Figure A 3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation see Chapter 4 Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A 8 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Interference Frequency Suppression Table A 4 contains the codes for the various frequencies which you enter in byte 1 of data record 1 see Figure A 3 The integration time must be calculated per channel Table A 4 Codes for the Interference Frequency Suppression of the Analog Input Modules Interference Frequency Suppression Reset Time Code ooo oR i i 25m Of ODHOO O 60 Hz 16 7 ms 2 01 50 Hz 20 ms 2 10 10 Hz 100 ms 2 11 Measurement Type and Measuring Ranges Table A 5 contains all the measuring ranges for the analog input modules The table also shows the codes for the measurement types and the measuring range You must enter these codes according to the measuring range desired in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 see Figure A 3 Note Please note that a measuring range module may need to be reconnected depending on the measuring range see Chapter 4 Table A 5 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analo
275. ping tool is required to connect the connector to the round sheath ribbon cable S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 11 SIMATIC TOP connect Connecting Cable End to the Connector Preassemble the connecting cable as follows 1 Cut the round sheath ribbon cable to the length required and remove part of the cable sheath at both ends The length of the cable sheath to be removed is indicated in the following table Cable End to Cable Sheath to be Removed Front Connector 20 pin 40 pin upper socket of front connector 110 mm 115mm lower socket of front connector 70 mm 75mm socket of terminal block 40 mm 2 Thread the round sheath ribbon cable into the 16 pin connector The positions of the details marked must be strictly observed see Figure 8 5 Figure 8 5 Threading the Round Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector 3 Press the end of the cable into the connector using the crimping tool 4 Secure the strain relief assembly at the connector of the terminal block Securing Strain Relief Assembly A strain relief assembly only needs to be attached to the plug in connector of the terminal block Proceed as follows Lay the round sheath ribbon cable back over the connector after pressing in You can then slide the enclosed strain relief assembly over the round sheath ribbon cable and engage it at the plug in connecto
276. plane bus Power loss approx 5 mA typ 0 03 W 5 6 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules 5 3 SM 338 POS Input Module Order Number 6ES7 338 4BC00 0ABO Characteristics The SM 338 POS input module is characterized by the following features e The SM 338 POS input module is an interface between up to three absolute position encoders SSIs and the CPU of SIMATIC S7 e You edit the encoder values obtained by the SM 338 in your STEP 7 program e You can respond directly in your process to encoder values in moving systems How the SM 338 POS Input Module Works The SM 338 POS input module makes available the SSI position encoder status in the process input range to the CPU It is also possible to freeze the SSI position encoder statuses via two module specific digital inputs This freeze function makes it possible to provide a solution for other time critical position detection applications Supported Encoder Types The following encoder types are supported e The absolute position encoder SSI with 13 bits e The absolute position encoder SSI with 21 bits e The absolute position encoder SSI with 25 bits Data Formats The data formats supported are gray code and binary code Parameterization You parameterize the SM 338 with HWConfig in STEP 7 as of Version 4 1 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specificati
277. pply e Output voltage e Output current Power input e From backplane bus e From load voltage L without load Power loss of the module Position detection line length with absolute encoders shielded Digital Inputs 10 11 Optical isolation Input voltage Input current Input delay Maximum repetition frequency Connection of a two wire BERO type 2 Shielded line length Unshielded line length Dimensions and Weight Data transmission rate and 40 x 125 x 120 Approx 235 g Voltages Currents Potentials DC 24V 20 4 28 8V No No only from shield DC 1V L 0 8V Max 900 mA short circuit proof Max 160 mA Max 10 mA Typically 3W Encoder Inputs POS INPUT 0 to 2 Absolute e 125 kHz max 320 m e 250 kHz max 160 m e 500 kHz max 60 m e 1 MHz max 20m No only from shield 0 signal 3V 5V 1 signal 11V 30 2V 0 signal lt 2 mA closed circuit current 1 signal 9 mA typically 0 gt 1 max 300 us 1 gt 0 max 300 us 1 kHz Possible 600 m 32m Status Interrupts Diagnostics Interrupts Status indication for digital Diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable LED green inputs Group error LED red Unsharpness of the Measured Value Minimum unsharpness Maximum unsharpness Frame time 130 us 2 x frame time monoflop time 600 us Frame time of the encoders 13 bit 21 bit 25 bit e 125 kHz 112us 176us 208 us
278. pply to the inputs Channel 0 Address Module start address 1 Module start address 2 bytes address offset Module start address 4 bytes address offset Module start address 6 bytes address offset Output Addresses The following channel addresses apply to the module outputs Channel 0 Address Module start address 1 Module start address 2 bytes address offset Measuring Ranges for the SM 334 The analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit has the measuring ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA In contrast to other analog modules however the analog input output module SM 334 has a lower resolution and no negative measuring ranges Observe this when reading Tables 4 5 and 4 6 Output Ranges for the SM 334 The analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit has the measuring ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA In contrast to other analog modules however the analog input output module SM 334 has a lower resolution and the analog outputs have no n measuring ranges Please remember this when reading Tables and 4 114 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 11 Analog Input Output Module SM334 Al 4 AO 2 x 12 Bit Order No 6ES7 334 0KE00 0ABO Characteristic Features The SM 334 has the following characteristic features 4 inputs in two groups 2 outputs voltage outp
279. put Module 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 32 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Connecting Resistance Type Thermometers e g Pt 100 and Resistances Resistance type thermometers and resistances are connected in a 4 wire circuit A constant current is supplied to the resistance type thermometer or resistance over terminals Ic and Ic_ The voltage generated at the resistance type thermometer or resistance is measured via the M and M terminals This results in a high measuring accuracy in the 4 wire circuit Figure 4 11 shows you how to connect resistance type thermometers to an isolated analog input module L Z M M es M ADC _ _ Lo C o gic Backplane bus a y k lc Mana Figure 4 11 Connecting Resistance Type Thermometers to an Isolated Analog Input Module In the 2 wire and 3 wire circuit you must insert jumpers between M and Ic and between M and Ic_ This however reduces the accuracy of the measuring results S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 33 Analog Modules 4 2 4 Connecting Loads Actuators to Analog Outputs Introduction You can use the analog output modules to supply loads actuators with current and voltage Cables for Analog Signals To reduce electrical interference you should use twisted pair shielded cabl
280. put Range 0to10V 0 11 7589 10 0004 10 0000 0 0 Units Decimal Hexadeci mal gt 32511 gt 7EFFy 32511 7EFFy 27649 6C01y 27648 6C00y 0 OH Range Overflow Overcontrol range Rated range Undercontrol range S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 123 Analog Modules 4 11 3 Parameters Structure of Record 1 4 124 Figure 4 30 shows you the structure of record 1 of the parameters for SM 334 7 0 Bit no Byte 0 Not relevant 7 0 Byte 1 Interference suppression WAI AO I Set the same parameters for all channels Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 See Table 4 49 Channel 3 7 4 3 0 Byte 2 Meas channel 0 Byte 3 Meas channel 1 Byte 4 Meas channel 2 Byte 5 Meas channel 3 ye Meas type Meas range See Table 1 6 7 4 3 0 Byte 6 Output channel 0 Byte 7 Output channel 1 Output type Output range See Table 4 51 Byte 8 Not relevant Byte 13 Figure 4 30 Record 1 of the SM 334 parameters S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Interference Suppression Table 4 49 contains the codes for the various frequencies which you enter in byte 1 of record 1 see Figure 4 30 You must count the resulting integration t
281. r 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 12 SIMATIC TOP connect 8 6 Wiring the Front Connector and the Terminal Block Introduction In the following section you will learn how to wire the connecting cable and the power supply at the front connector and at the terminal block Connecting the Cable to the Front Connector Wire the front connector as follows see also Section 8 3 Table 8 7 Wiring the Front Connector Step 8 16 Channel Digital Modules 32 Channel Digital Modules 1 Open the front door 2 Bring the front connector into the wiring position 3 If required connect the cables for the power supply of the digital module Observe the assignment of the supply terminals to the flat ribbon terminals see Figure 8 2 Plug the round sheath ribbon cable into the front connector 5 Twist the round sheath ribbon cable downwards by 90 and then by a complete turn if possible 6 Thread a strain relief assembly into the middle of the front connector This strain relief serves to fix the round sheath ribbon cable into the tight cable space of the module TA Thread the strain relief assembly into the front connector S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 13 SIMATIC TOP connect Attaching the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block 1 Attach the
282. r Supply Module 2 A Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 5 A Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 5A Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 82 24NDC aaaea e herd bate eit non tee ae aGu awed Fie ake Ps Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI16 X 24 VDG iss cee es cee cee ha eke ede Ce ee eee ee Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts 00 c cee eee eee Terminal Connection Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16x24 VDC Source Input 0 0 eee Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16x120 VAG secsi irienna ct noe Beene ese ne da ee ede ek Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230 VAC 1 cei cect tte eeees Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 32 x120 VAC 2 cette eees Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 1 ccc eeeee Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 24 VDC 0 5 A 1 ccc ttt eeee Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Digita
283. r the standard temperature range of the Ni 100 sensor Table 4 10 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Standard Temperature Range Ni 100 Standard Units Range Temperature Range Ni 100 Decimal Hexa 250 C decimal gt 295 0 32767 7FFF Overflow 295 0 2950 B864 Overrange 250 1 2501 9C5H 250 0 2500 9C4y i Nominal range 60 0 600 FDA8y 60 1 601 FDA7y Underrange 105 0 1050 FBE6y lt 105 0 32768 80004 Underflow S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 11 Analog Modules Climate Temperature Range Ni 100 Table 4 11 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the climate temperature range of the Ni 100 sensor Table 4 11 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Climate Temperature Range Ni 100 Standard Temperature Range Ni 100 250 C gt 295 00 295 00 250 01 250 00 60 00 60 01 105 00 lt 105 00 Units Decimal Hexa decimal 32767 7FFFy 29500 733Cy 25001 61A9y 25000 61A8y 6000 E8904 6001 E88Fy 10500 D6FCy 32768 8000H Range Overflow Overrange Nominal range Underrange Underflow Temperature Range Type K Table 4 12 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the temperature range sensor type K Table 4 12 Representati
284. ram Figure 4 27 shows the block diagram of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit The detailed technical specifications for this analog output module are on the following pages Fault LED red Current Voltage Outputs Outputs SM332 feito AO 4x16 BIT SF REN O Galvanic Isolation o ze o 3 Qlo QVo o KERES S 5 D E a4 So paar CHO So CHO n C z 6 Mana 0 MANA 0 Ww o E BS Qh QV1 oO 8 Sit qe 9 CH1 S1 CH1 oo a o 10 Mana 1 MANA 1 x 11 Ql2 QV2 o 12 S2 o bac CH2 S2 13 2 CH2 o m Rea A 14 MANA 2 MANA 2 o 15 Ql QV3 o P Bus Q6 oe o interface 17 CH3 S3 CH3 5 t 18 MANA3 MANA3 dilo Oo M 20 M 332 7ND00 0ABO Figure 4 27 Block Diagram of Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 104 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 120mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in appro
285. re of the mi on e Between the L1 terminals of 250 VAC e To increase power Not possible the groups Between the input 120 VAC Driving of digital input Possible L1 Tenia and the Max switching frequency central grounding point Seip ve e e Insulation tested with 1500 VAC esistive loos max Oe e Inductive loads max 0 5 Hz Current drawn Lamp loads 1Hz e From backplane bus max 100 mA ont e From L1 without load max 275 mA Short circuit protection of output 7 A fuse 125 V per group not replaceable Module power losses typ max 25 W 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 58 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules 3 3 Relay Output Modules List of Relay Output Modules The following relay output modules are described in this chapter e SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC REL e SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL e SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC 5A REL 3 3 1 Relay Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC REL Order No 6ES7 322 1HH00 0AA0 Characteristics The relay output module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC REL has the following salient features e 16 output points isolated in groups of 8 e Load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC 48 VAC to 120 VAC e Suitable for AC DC solenoid valves contactors motor starters fractional h p motors and indicator lights Note When the power supply is switched off the capacitor still stores energy for about 200 ms The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within
286. resentation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Standard Temperature Range Pt 100 2 05 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 0 2005 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Standard Temperature Range Ni 100 0 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Climate Temperature Range Ni 100 2005 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type K 2 cee eee ee ees Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type N 2 cece eee eee Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type J 0 0 c cece eee Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Ranges Type E 2 ce cece eee eee Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type L 2 cee eee ee eee Representation of the Analog Output Range of the Analog Output Modules Voltage Output Ranges 0 cece eee ees Representation of the Analog Output Range of the Analog Output Modules Current Output Ranges 0 06 eee eee Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 0
287. ress written authority Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved Siemens AG Automation and Drives A amp D Industrial Automation Systems AS Postfach 4848 D 90327 Nurnberg Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hard ware and software described Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full agreement However the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions Suggestions for improvement are welcomed Siemens AG 1998 Technical data subject to change Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Preface Purpose The information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator actions function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal modules power supply modules and interface modules of the S7 300 How to configure assemble and wire these modules in an S7 300 M7 300 or ET 200M system is described in the installation manuals for each system Audience This manual describes the modules of the S7 300 which are used in the S7 300 M7 300 and ET 200M systems It includes data sheets for the signal modules power supply modules and interface modules of the S7 300 Modifications Since the Last Version The following modifications have been made since the last versi
288. rious circuits are based and accord ing to which they are measured 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Glossary 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Glossary RESTART On transition from the STOP to the RUN mode the PLC goes through the RE START mode It can be triggered using the gt Mode Selector or after a power on or through operator intervention on the programming device With the S7 300 a gt Com plete Restart is carried out S7 300 Backplane Bus The S7 300 backplane bus is a serial data bus the modules use to communicate with each other and from which they draw the power they require The connec tion between the modules is implemented via bus connectors SFC System Function Signal Module Signal modules SMs are the interface between the process and the program mable controller Signal modules comprise digital input and output modules in put output module digital and analog input and output modules input output module analog STEP 7 Programming language for generating user programs for SIMATIC S7 program mable controllers Substitute Value Substitute values are values which are output to the process in the case of faulty signal output modules or which are used in the user program instead of a pro cess variable in the case of faulty signal input modules The substitute values can be specified in advance by the user for example maintain old value System Diagnostics System
289. rmiss surge current per group eat 0 signal Residual current Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of motor starter Lamp load Parallel connection of 2 outputs e for redundant actuation of a load e to increase power Actuation of digital input Switching frequency e Resistive loads e Inductive loads to IEC 947 5 1 AC 15 e Lamp loads Short circuit protection of output e Min current required for fuse to blow e Max response time Spare fuses e Wickmann e Schurter e Littlefuse Fuse holder e Wickmann min L1 8 5 V 2A 10 mA to 2 A 10 mAto 1A max 20 A with 2 half waves max 2 mA max 60 V max size 5 to NEMA max 50 W Possible only outputs of the same group Not possible Possible max 10 Hz max 0 5 Hz max 1 Hz 8 A fuse 250 V per group min 40 A max 300 ms 8 A fuse quick acting 19 194 8 A SP001 1013 217 008 19 653 Status display Interrupts Diagnostics functions e Group fault display on the module fuse or no L1 N Green LED per channel None Red LED SF S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 55 Digital Modules 3 2 7 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 32 x 120 VAC 1 0A Order No 6ES7 322 1EL00 0AA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 322 DO 32 x 120 VAC 1 0 A has the following salient features e 32 output points fused and isolated
290. rmissible common mode voltage between channels of 50 VDC maximum 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 70 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 4 23 shows the terminal connection diagram for the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit Note that Channel 0 is configured for current and Channel 7 is configured for voltage The detailed technical specifications for this analog input module are on the following page 2 250 OHM Fault LED red SM331 Al 8x16 Bit 250 OHM 7 OQ _ 8 Galvanic Isolation 250 OHM Ja Logic and back plane bus interface 331 7NF00 0AB0 reno Te 5V from back plane Internal supply Figure 4 23 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of Analog Input Module SM 331 AIl 8 x 16
291. roups e The individual output channels can be programmed as voltage outputs current outputs e Resolution 12 bits e Programmable diagnostics e Programmable diagnostics interrupt e Porgrammable substitute value output e Galvanic isolation to CPU and load voltage 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Note When switching on and off the rated load voltage L wrong intermediate values can be present at the output for approx 10 ms Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 4 25 shows the module view and the block diagram of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit You will find the detailed technical specifications of the analog output module on the following pages Fault LEDs red Current Voltage output output 4 L SF internal DAU ee o l supply 1 3 Qlo QVo NE Peas 3 3 au 3 CHO 5 CHO 3 az Mana Mana be Ql QV 2 Galvanic i 3 S T 5 isolation u 5 CH1 S CHI 5 J ae i Mana MANA D N Ql QV gt Logic and SF 12 S2 o backplane bus o interface j EU 13
292. rror in the negative range e g incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module signals underflow below FOC5y and outputs 8000p 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 14 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Temperature Range Type L Table 4 16 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the temperature range sensor type L Table 4 16 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Temperature Range Type L Temperature Units Range Range in C Type L Decimal Hexadecimal gt 1150 32767 7FFFy Overflow 1150 11500 2CECy Overrange 901 9010 23324 900 9000 23284 i Nominal range 200 2000 F830y lt 200 lt 2000 lt F830 Underrange In the case of incorrect wiring e g polarity reversal or open inputs or of a sensor error in the negative range e g incorrect thermocouple type the analog input module signals underflow below FOC5y and outputs 8000p Measuring Ranges for the SM 334 The analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit has the measuring ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA In contrast to other analog modules however the analog input output module SM 334 has a lower resolution and no negative measuring ranges Please observe this when reading Tables 4 5 and 4 6 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 15 Analog Modules
293. rupt 00 Parameters of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt 0 0 eee Diagnostics Messages of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt 0 0 2 c cette eee Diagnostics Messages Error Causes and Error Correction Dependence of the Input Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Power Supply L of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt 0 eee nee Analog Value Representation 0 0 0 cece cece eee Bit Pattern of a 15 Bit and a 12 Bit Analog Value Example Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values 0202 0 ee eeeuee Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Voltage Ranges cece eens Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input J AW Module Voltage and Current Measuring Ranges 4 6 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Voltage and Current Measuring Ranges 4 7 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Resistance Type Sensors 0000 cece eee eee 4 8 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Contents 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 4 29 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 36 4 37 4 38 4 39 Rep
294. s LEDs green Fault display red Figure 3 14 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC 1 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 51 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120 mm WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 300 g 10 5 oz Module Specific Data Number of output points 16 max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Load voltage L1 Total current of the outputs per group e horizontal installation up to 40 C 104 F up to 60 C 140 F e vertical installation up to 40 C 104 F Galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences between Minternal and the outputs between the outputs of different groups Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus e from load voltage L1 without load Module power losses 120 VAC max 4 A max 2 A max 2 A Yes Yes 120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC max 184 mA max 3 mA typ max 9 W Output voltage e at 1 signal Output current e at 1 signal Rated value Permiss current for 0 C to 40 C Permiss current for 40 C to 60 C Permiss surge current per group e at
295. s a placeholder for e Interface modules without reserving address space e Non configured digital modules reserving address space e Modules occupying 2 slots In this case you must plug in two dummy modules with the dummy module in slot x reserving the address space and the dummy module in slot x 1 reserving no address space see also Table 5 1 Note No more than 8 modules SM FM CP may be plugged into a module rack For example if you reserve a slot for a module of 80 mm width using 2 dummy modules you can plug in only 6 other modules SM FM CP Configuration with STEP 7 Use STEP 7 to configure the dummy module only if you are using the module to reserve the slot for a parameterized signal module If the module is to reserve the slot for an interface module you need not configure the module with STEP 7 Configuration for ET 200M If you use the dummy module DM 370 in an ET 200M setup with active bus modules you must configure an input or output address range of 0 bytes for the dummy module see also Table 5 1 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 5 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Other Signal Modules Front and Rear View of the Dummy Module Figure 5 2 shows the front and rear view of the dummy module DM 370 and the position of the address assignment switch z eS
296. s min 5 KQ e for voltage measurement Possible with capacitive load max 1 uF e for current measurement e with current outputs max 300 Q as 2 wire transducer Not possible with capacitive load max 1 mH as 4 wire transducer Possible Voltage output Analog Value Generation for the Outputs e Short circuit protection Yes Resolution 8 bits Short circuit current max 11 mA Conversion time all channels 5ms Current output Settling time e No load voltage max 15 V e for resistive load 0 3 ms Destruction limit for e for capacitive load 3 0 ms voltages currents connected from outside e for inductive load 0 3 ms e Voltage at outputs to Mana max 15 V continuously Injection of substitute values No e Current max DC 50 mA Interference Suppress Error Limits for the Outputs Connection of actuators Crosstalk between the outputs gt 40 dB e for voltage output Operational limit 2 wire connection Possible in the total temperature range 4 wire connection Not possible referred to the output range measuring line e Voltage output 0 6 e for current output Possible 2 wire connection e Current output 1 0 Basic error operational limit at 25 C or 77 F referred to the output range e Voltage output 0 5 e Current output 0 5 Temperature error referred to 0 02 K the output range Linearity error referred to the 0 05 output range 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifi
297. set the parameters in the user program with an SFC See Figure A 3 in Appendix A of the S7 300 Installation and Hardware Manual for more information Table 4 34 Assignment of Channels of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 8 x 16 Bit to Channel Groups Channels Form One Channel Group Each Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel group 0 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel group 1 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel group 2 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel group 3 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 74 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Unused Input Channels Unused channels of the analog input module SM331 Al 8 x 16 Bit should be deactivated using STEP 7 in order to reduce the module s cycle time See Section 4 3 4 of the S7 300 Installation and Hardware manual for more information Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation you should make the following preparation for these inputs if diagnostics on the used channels are enabled e Measuring range 1 to 5 V Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group e Current measurement 4 to 20 mA Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group Ensure that a current sense resistor is connected for each active and unused channel e Other ranges Short the positive to the negative input of the channel Current Measurement Mode C
298. set the substitute value E5004 so that the output remains de energized see Tables 4 17 and in Chapter 4 e The representation of the substitute values corresponds to the representation of the analog values see Chapter 4 You should observe the relevant range limits when setting the substitute values Output Type and Output Ranges Table A 7 contains all output ranges for the analog output modules Also shown in the table are the codes for the output type and the output range You must enter these codes according to the measuring range desired in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 see Figure A 4 Table A 7 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules Output Type Code Output Range Code Deactivated 2 0000 Deactivated 2 0000 Voltage 2 0001 1to5V 240111 0to10V 2 1000 10V 2 1001 Current 2 0010 O to 20 mA 2 0010 4 to 20 mA 2 0011 20 mA 2 0100 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 A 13 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules B In this Appendix This appendix describes the configuration of the diagnostics data in the system data You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostics data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program Further References The reference manual System and Standard Functions includes an
299. splay red Figure 3 15 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Output Module SM 322 3 54 DO 8 x AC 120 230 V 2 A 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Actuator Selection Data Dimensions WxHxD Weight 40 x 125 x 120 mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in approx 275 g 9 63 oz Module Specific Data Number of output points Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L1 Total current of the outputs per group e horizontal installation up to 40 C 104 F up to 60 C 140 F e vertical installation up to 40 C 104 F Galvanic isolation e between channels and backplane bus e between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences e between Minternal and the outputs between the outputs of different groups Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus e from load voltage L1 without load Module power losses 120 230 VAC max 4A max 2A max 2A Yes Yes 230 VAC 500 VAC 1500 VAC max 100 mA max 2 mA typ 8 6 W Status Interrupts Diagnostics Output voltage eat 1 signal Output current e at 1 signal Rated value Permiss current for 0 C to 40 C Permiss current for 40 C to 60 C Pe
300. stic Messages of the SM 338 0 cece eee eens 5 3 7 Technical Specifications sssaaa aaae 5 3 8 Configuration and Parameter Assignment Frame 005 6 Interface Modules c cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 6 1 Interface Module IM 360 eee eee 6 2 Interface Module IM 361 0 cece 6 4 6 3 Interface Module IM 365 00cceeeeeeeeeeee tense eeee teas 7 HS 485 Repeaiel xetevcdievet arisen eatereinanebuniuediudeneiabnemveau 7 4 Application and Properties 00 0 cece eee eee 7 2 Technical Specifications 00 cette eee 7 5 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 IX Contents 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 SIMATIC TOP connect Application Areas and Components of SIMATIC TOP Connect 8 2 Terminal Assignments for Wiring the Terminal Block Wiring Rules for the Terminal Block and the Front Connector Screw Type Connections or Spring Loaded Connections 8 10 Preparing the Connecting Cables 0 0 0 cece cece eens 8 11 Wiring the Front Connector and the Terminal Block 8 13 Wiring Digital Modules with SIMATIC TOP Connect 8 15 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program A 2 Parameters
301. supply source plexer module 3 Mo M za 0 o j c S V GRRE Won e ga 5 My _ Ico z A 1 co o o o Internal D q a Pa compensation i 10 3 External compensation Comp AB None Comp 11 Comp Mana ADU ke D q o o Galvanic isolation o o Logicand SF backplane bus D q 5 interface j o 20 M o M Figure 4 24 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 81 Analog Modules Dimensions and Weight Analog Value Generation Length of cable shielded e with resistance type sensor Dimensions 40 x 125 x 120 mm WxHxD 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in Weight approx 250 g 8 75 oz Module Specific Data Number of inputs 2 1 max 200 m 218 yd max 50 m 54 5 yd at 80 mV and thermocouples Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L Power supplies of the transducers e Supply current for 2 group e Short circuit proof e Constant current for resistance type sensor Galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus voltage L Ucm atsignal 0V not for 2 wire transducer Uigo e Insulation tested with Current consumption e from backplane bus e from load voltage L without load Power losses of the module e Reverse polarity protection channels each of
302. suring range 80 mV Type E NiCr CuNi Type J Fe CuNi Type K NiCr Ni Type L Fe CuNi Measuring Method Description Measuring Range Measuring Range Selected Type of Sensor Module Setting Voltage You will find the digitized analog 80 mV A values in Sectio Tables 4 4 250 mV and 4 6 in the voltage measuring 4 500 mV range 1000 mV 2 5V B 5V 1to5V 10 V Thermocouples You will find the digitized analog Typ N NiCrSi NiSi A internal compensation values in Section 4 1 2 Table 4 4 TypeE NiCr CuNi thermovoltage in the voltage measuring Type J Fe CuNi measurement range 80 mV ype J Fe GuNi Type K NiCr Ni Type L Fe CuNi Thermocouples Type N NiCrSi NiSi A Measuring Ranges for Current Measurement Table 4 39 lists all of the measuring ranges for current measurement with 2 wire and 4 wire transducers as well as the relevant measuring range module settings Table 4 39 Measuring Ranges for 2 Wire and 4 Wire Transducers Measuring Method Description Measuring Range Measuring Range Selected Module Setting 2 wire transducers You will find the digitzed analog 4 to 20 mA D values in Section 4 1 2 Tables 4 5 and 4 6 in the current measuring range 4 wire transducers You will find the digitzed analog 3 2 mA C and Section 4 1 2 Tables 4 5 4 10 mA and 4 6 in the current measuring range 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 20 mA 4 88 S7 300 and M7 3
303. suring range module positions you can use the following measuring methods and measuring ranges without re initializing the analog input module SM 331 Al2 x 12 Bit with STEP 7 Table 4 37 Default Settings of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Module Measuring Range Module Setting Measuring Method Measuring Range Voltage 1000 mV B Voltage 10V Current 4to 20 mA 4 wire transducer D Current 4 to 20 mA 2 wire transducer These measuring methods and measuring ranges are the default settings on the module You only have to insert the measuring range module to the required setting see Section 4 3 Special Feature of Process Interrupts You can set a process interrupt in STEP 7 for the channel group Note however that the process interrupt is set only for the 1st channel of the channel group i e 4 86 for channel 0 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 6 3 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module SM 331 Al 2 x 12 Bit Measuring Methods You can set the following measuring methods on the analog input module SM 331 Al2 x 12 Bit e Voltage measurement e Current measurement e Resistance measurement e Temperature measurement Use STEP 7 and the measuring range module on the analog input module to make the necessary settings see Section 4 3 4 Meas
304. t 100 sensor Table 4 8 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Standard Temperature Range Pt 100 Standard Units Range Temperature Range Pt 100 Decimal Hexa 850 C decimal gt 1000 0 32767 7FFFy Overflow 1000 0 10000 27104 Overrange 850 1 8501 21354 850 0 8500 21344 i Nominal range 200 0 2000 F830y 200 1 2001 F82Fy i Underrange 243 0 2430 F6824 lt 243 0 32768 80004 Underflow S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 9 Analog Modules Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 Table 4 9 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the climate temperature range of the Pt 100 sensor Table 4 9 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of an Analog Input Module Climate Temperature Range Pt 100 Standard Units Range Temperature Range Pt 100 Decimal Hexa 130 C decimal gt 155 00 32767 7FFFy Overflow 155 00 15500 3C8Cy Overrange 130 01 13001 32C9y 130 00 13000 32C8y Nominal range 120 00 12000 D120y 120 01 12001 D11Fy Underrange 145 00 14500 C75CH lt 145 00 32768 8000H Underflow S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 10 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Standard Temperature Range Ni 100 Table 4 10 shows the representation of the digitized measured value fo
305. t points isolated in groups of 8 e 0 5 A output current e 24VDC rated load voltage e Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and signal lights e 2terminals per output Output without series diode Output with series diode for redundant load control e Configurable diagnostics e Configurable diagnostics interrupt e Configurable substitute value output e Group fault LED e Channel specific status and error LEDs Use in This I O modules can be used in the e 7 300 centralized configuration with the CPU 312 IFM__ from 6ES7 312 5AC00 0AB0 revision level 5 313 from 6ES7 313 1AD00 0ABO revision level 3 314 from 6ES7 314 1AE01 0AB0 revision level 6 314 IFM from 6ES7 314 5AE00 0AB0 revision level 1 315 from 6ES7 315 1AF00 0ABO revision level 3 315 2 from 6ES7 315 2AF00 0ABO revision level 3 614 from 6ES7 614 1AH01 0AB3 revision level 6 e ET 200M with the IM 153 1 from 6ES7 153 1AA02 0XB0 revision level 1 IM 153 2 from 6ES7 153 2Ax00 0XB0 revision level 1 IM 153 3 from 6ES7 153 3AA00 0XB0 revision level 1 and with the following DP masters IM308C from 6ES5 308 3UC11 revision level 3 and CPUs 41x from 6ES7 41x 2XG00 0ABO revision level 2 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 38 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 11 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital output module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VD
306. te x 3 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data Dimensions W x H x D Weight 40 x 125 x 120mm 1 56 x 4 88 x 4 68 in approx 260 g Module Specific Data Number of input points Length of cable e Unshielded e Shielded 32 max 600 m 654 yd max 1000 m 1090 yd Voltages Currents Potentials Rated load voltage L e Reverse polarity protection Number of input points that can be driven simultaneously e Horizontal installation up to 40 C up to 60 C e Vertical installation up to 40 C Galvanic isolation e between channels and backplane bus e between the channels in groups of Permiss potential differences between different circuits Insulation tested with Current drawn e from backplane bus e from load voltage L Module power losses 24 VDC Yes 32 16 32 Yes Yes 16 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC max 15 mA typ 6 5 W Input voltage e Rated value e for 1 signal e for 0 signal Input current e at 1 signal Input delay e from 0 to 1 e from 1 to 0 Input characteristic Connection of 2 wire BEROs Permissible closed circuit current 24 VDC 13 to 30 V 3to5V typ 7 mA 1 2 to 4 8 ms 1 2 to 4 8 ms To IEC 1131 type 1 Possi
307. ted from outside e Voltage at outputs to Mana Connection of actuators 2 wire connection 4 wire connection measuring line 0to10V Min 2 5 kQ Max 1 0 uF Yes Max 10 mA Max 15 V continuously Possible Not possible S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 119 Analog Modules 4 11 1 Starting Up the SM 334 STEP 7V 4 0 Analog input output module SM 334 Al4 AO2 x 12Bit is only contained in the module catalog of STEP 7V 4 0 and higher Configuration You set the prescribed function parameters of the SM 334 e with STEP 7 before start up see User Manual STEP 7 or the online help in STEP 7 e inthe user program with SFCs see Reference Manual STEP 7 System and Standard Functions Default Settings The SM 334 has the following default settings e for the analog inputs Pt 100 climate range e for the analog outputs 0 to 10 V Wiring Versions You can wire the channels of the SM 334 for the following combinations Channels 0 e 2xPt 100 and 1 e 2xresistance Channels 2 e 2xvoltage and 3 e 2xresistance e 2xPt100 e 1xPt100 1 x voltage e 1xresistance 1 x voltage Unused Input Channels You must short circuit unused channels of the SM 334 and connect them to Mana You thus obtain optimum interference protection for your analog module You should also deactivate unused channels during configuration with STEP 7 see Sec
308. ted variables Chassis Ground The chassis ground comprises all interconnected inactive parts of an apparatus which even in case of a fault cannot take dangerous touch voltages CPU Central processing unit of the S7 programmable controller with control and arith metic unit memory operating system and interface for programming device Data Block Data blocks DB are data areas in the user program which contain user data Global data blocks can be accessed by all code blocks and instance data blocks are assigned to a specific FB call Diagnostics System Diagnostics Diagnostics Buffer The diagnostics buffer is a backed up memory area in the CPU where diagnostic events are stored in the order they occur Diagnostics Interrupt Modules with diagnostics capability signal system errors to the CPU by means of diagnostic interrupts 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Glossary 1 Glossary Equipotential Bonding An electrical connection equipotential bonding conductor that ties the exposed conductive parts of an item of electrical equipment and extraneous conductive parts to the same or approximately the same potential in order to prevent dis turbing or dangerous voltages between these parts Error Display Error display is one of the possible responses of the operating system to a gt Run Time Error The other possible responses include Error Response in the user
309. ter contains the technical specifications for the following groups of digital modules Section Conients Page 3 1 Digital Input Modules 3 2 3 2 Digital Output Modules 3 31 3 3 Relay Output Modules 3 59 3 4 Digital Input Output Modules 3 70 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 1 Digital Modules 3 1 Digital Input Modules List of Digital Input Modules This chapter describes the following digital input modules e SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC e SM 321 DI16 x 24 VDC e SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts e SM 321 DI16 x 120 VAC e SM 321 DI8 x 120 230 VAC e SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC source input e SM 321 DI32 x 120 VAC 3 1 1 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC Order Number 6ES7 321 1BL00 0AA0 Characteristics The digital input module SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC has the following salient features e 32 input points isolated in groups of 32 e 24VDC rated input voltage e Suitable for switches and 2 3 4 wire BEROs proximity switches 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 2 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 1 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital input module SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC You will find the detailed technical specifications of the SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC on the following page
310. ter power supply pin M5 2 is eaten the ground reference if you want to measure the voltage ca eee e 0 difference between terminals A2 and B2 SG 5 Tt o Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable AB AS of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2 a Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1 e98 coe Terminating resistance for bus segment 1 mt Switch for baud rate The various positions have the following meaning eee n m 0 bus segments separated from each other 5 500 kbaud EM 1 9 6 kbaud 6 1 5 Mbaud Oi 2 19 2 kbaud 7 3Mbaud SIEMENS 3 93 75 kbaud 8 6 Mbaud RS 485 REPEATER 4 187 5 kbaud 9 12 Mbaud SEeee ay 0 Terminating resistance for bus segment 2 AB AB Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2 S S Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the n ee standard rail Interface for programming device OP in bus segment 1 Grounded or Ungrounded The RS 485 repeater is e grounded if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded potential e ungrounded if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded potential S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 7 3 RS 485 Repeater Note The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device to the PG OP socket of the RS 485 repeater Ground connection
311. teristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit Order No 6ES7 332 5HB01 0ABO Characteristic Features The analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit has the following characteristic features 2 output in 2 channels groups The individual output channels can be programmed as voltage outputs current outputs Resolution 12 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostics interrupt Programmable substitute value output Galvanic isolation to CPU and load voltage Note When switching on and off the rated load voltage L wrong intermediate values can be present at the output for approx 10 ms S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 97 Analog Modules Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 4 26 shows the module view and the block diagram of the analog output module SM 332 AO 2 x 12 Bit You will find the detailed technical specifications of the analog output module on the following pages Fault LEDs red Current Voltage output output ig 4 L SF Internal DAU aN g supply BR Be Galvanic o isolation o qF U g IN 10 Mma Mana Logic and L SF o backplane bus D interface H
312. terrupt is enabled The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of priority classes with low priority and processes the process interrupt block OB 40 The 4 bytes of the additional process interrupt information of OB 40 indicate which channel has exceeded which limit value Contents of the 4 bytes of 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Byte additional information Analog modules 2 bits per channel for marking the range Value exceeds upper limit in 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 channel NI o ol A 99 N a a Value falls below lower limit in channel S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 55 Analog Modules Process Interrupt Example The following figure shows when the analog module triggers a process interrupt e If the value exceeds the upper limit e If the value falls below the lower limit Measured value Upper limit Lower limit Process interrupt Value exceeds the upper limit Value falls below the lower limit 0 0 1 0 4 3 7 Behavior of the Analog Modules Introduction In this section you will find information on e How the analog input and output values depend on the supply voltage of the analog module and the operating states of the CPU e The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie within the value range e The influ
313. terrupts You enable the The diagnostics information is assigned either to the channel groups or to the module as a whole Table 3 5 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic Message Scope of the Configurable Diagnostics Sensor supply missing Channel group Yes External auxiliary power missing Module Internal auxiliary power missing Module Fuse blown Module Incorrect parameter on module Module Watchdog timeout Module Si EPROM error Module RAM error Module Process interrupt lost Module Diagnostics Message Read Out You can read out the detailed diagnostics messages using STEP 7 Detailed diagnostics messages can be read out in the user program with the SFC 59 see Appendix B and Reference Manual System and Standard Functions S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 15 Digital Modules Error Causes and Error Correction In Table 3 6 the diagnostics messages for the possible error causes and measures for error correction are listed Please note that the signal module must be configured so as to detect the missing sensor supply Table 3 6 Diagnostics Messages Error Causes and Error Correction Diagnostics Message Sensor supply missing Possible Error Cause Overload of sensor supply Error Correction Eliminate overload Short circuit
314. th Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail 0 cece eee Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for Insert and Remove Function with Active Bus Module S7 300 Module and Explosion proof Partition Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules 0000 Power Supply Module PS 307 2A 0 c cee eee Power Supply Module PS 307 5A 00 ccc ees Power Supply Module PS 307 10 A 0 2 cece eee Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307 5 A with CPUs 313 314 315 315 2 DP Front View 0000s Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307 5 A with CPUs 313 314 315 315 2 DP Side View 00 ec eeeeeeeee Interface Module IM 360 cece eee eee Interface Module IM 361 0 cee eens Interface Module IM 365 0 eee eee Signal Module 0 00 ccc eee ete eens 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 XIII Contents xiv 3 8 3 9 3 10 SIMATIC TOP Connect 3 Tier 2 0 0 cece eee eens SIMATIC TOP Connect 2 Tier 2 0 0 0 cee SIMATIC TOP Connect 1 Tier 0 cece teens RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail 0 ccc cece eee eee RS 485 Repeater on S7 300 Rail 0 0 teens Electrostatic Voltages which can Build up on a Person Rated Voltages of the S
315. the S7 300 1 7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules 1 12 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 1 1 General Technical Specifications 1 1 Standards and Approvals Introduction This section provides information on the modules and components of the S7 300 with reference to e the most important standards whose criteria are met by the S7 300 and e approbations for the S7 300 IEC 1131 The S7 300 programmable controller meets the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 1131 Part 2 CE Marking 1 2 Our products meet the requirements and protection objectives of the following EC Directives and comply with the harmonized European standards EN issued in the Official Journal of the European Communities with regard to programmable controllers e 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive e 73 23 EEC Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage Limits Low Voltage Directive The declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungstechnik A amp D ASE 4 Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg Germany S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 General Technical Specifications EMC Directive SIMATIC products have been designed for use in industrial environments Area of Applic
316. tinuously 75 V for max 1 s duty factor 1 20 e Current max DC 50 mA Connection of actuators e Voltage output 2 wire connection Possible 4 wire connection Possible measuring leads e Current output 2 wire connection Possible S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 93 Analog Modules 4 7 2 Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit Parameter Assignment The functions of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit are set as follows e with STEP 7 also see STEP 7 User Manual or e inthe user program by means of SFCs see STEP7 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit is in operation intermediate values may appear at the output Default Settings The analog output module has default settings for the type of output diagnostics interrupts etc see Table These default settings are valid if you have not re initialized the module with STEP 7 Parameter Assignment You can configure each output channel of the SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit individually Advantage You can assign individual parameters for each output channel When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program the parameters are assigned to channel groups Each output channel of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 12 Bit is then assigned to one channel group
317. tion Short circuit to P Always Short circuit at output to L of Eliminate short circuit module supply Short circuit to M Only with Overload of output Eliminate overload output tos Short circuit of output to M Eliminate short circuit Wire break Only with Open circuit between module Establish wire connection output to 1 and actuator Channel not used open Disable for the channel by setting parameter diagnostics wirebreak Load voltage missing Only with Defective output Replace module output to 1 External auxiliary Always Power supply L to module Feed supply L power missing missing Internal auxiliary Always Power supply L to module Feed supply L power missing missing Fuse in module defective Replace module Fuse blown Always Fuse in module defective Replace module Watchdog timeout Always Temporary high Eliminate interferences electromagnetic interferences Module defective Replace module EPROM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interferences and electromagnetic interferences switch on off power supply of CPU Module defective Replace module RAM error Always Temporary high Eliminate interferences and electromagnetic interferences switch on off power supply of CPU Module defective Replace module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 45 Digital Modules Interrupts The digital module can trigger a diagnostics interrupt
318. tion 4 3 4 in the Module Specifications Reference Manual in order to reduce the cycle time of the module 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 4 120 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Unused Output Channels To ensure that unused output channels of the SM 334 are voltage free you must deactivate them and leave them open You deactivate an output channel during configuration with STEP 7 in the Output parameter block see Section 4 3 4 in the Module Specifications Reference Manual 4 11 2 Analog Value Representation Analog Values The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values with the same rated range The analog values are represented in two s complement Table 4 1 shows the analog value representation of the analog modules Table 4 45 Analog Value Representation Resolution Analog Value Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Significance of the bits S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 2 26 25 24 233 2 21 20 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 121 Analog Modules Analog Value Table 4 46 contains the analog value representation for the measuring ranges 10 kQ and 0 to 10 V Table 4 46 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for Measuring Ranges 10 kQ and 0 to 10 V Measuring Range Units 10 kQ O0to10V Decimal Hexadeci mal gt 11 7589 gt 11
319. tion reduced internally to Short circuit protection of output e Response threshold typ L 45 V Yes electronic 0 75 to 1 5 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 3 41 Digital Modules Setting the Parameters You set the parameters for the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt using STEP 7 Table 3 9 indicates the digital output module parameters that can be set You must enter the settings when the CPU is in the STOP state The parameters are transferred from the programming device to the CPU of the S7 300 and stored there These parameters are passed by the CPU to the digital module You can also change some of the parameters in the user program with the SFC 55 see Reference Manual System and Standard Functions According to the two alternative ways of setting the parameters they are divided into e Static parameters e Dynamic parameters Table 3 8 below describes the properties of the static and dynamic parameters Table 3 8 Static and Dynamic Parameters of the SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt Parameter Settable with Operating State of the CPU Static Programming device STOP Dynamic Programming device STOP SFC 55 in user program RUN Default Settings The SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with diagnostics interrupt has the following default settings for diagnostics substitute values et
320. tive devices Contents This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices Section Contents Page E 1 What is ESD E 2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons E 3 E 3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge E 4 Damage S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 E 1 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices ESD E 1 Definition E 2 What is ESD All electronic modules are equipped with large scale integrated ICs or components Due to their design these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices are commonly referred to by the abbreviation ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices are labelled with the following symbol Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings These voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged In most cases the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sens
321. to Read the Measured Value Tables Tables 4 4 to 4 15 contain the digitized analog values for the various measuring ranges Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same these tables only contain the measured values and the units This makes the tables clearer and easier to read You will find the binary representations corresponding to the measured values in Table 4 3 Measured Value Resolution The resolution of the analog values may vary depending on the analog module and the parameters assigned to it For the resolutions lt 15 bits the bits marked with an x are set to 0 Note This resolution does not apply to temperature values The converted temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module see Tables 4 8 to 4 15 Table 4 3 Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values T Units Analog Value CS Decimal Hexa High Order Byte Low Order Byte decimal 8 a2 oa VZ0o000000 1xxxxxxx 9 64 40H VZ0000000 01XXXXXX 10 32 20H VZ0000000 001xxxxx 11 16 10H VZ0000000 0001xxxx 12 8 8H VZ0000000 00001xxx 13 4 44 VZ0000000 000001xx 14 2 2H VZ0000000 0000001x 15 1 1H VZ0000000 00000001 4 4 S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules Voltage Measuring Ranges Table 4 4 shows the representation of the digitized measured value for the voltage measuring ranges 80 mV 250 mV
322. tor Contents In this Chapter the following is described referring to SIMATIC TOP connect Section Conients Page lt n Application Areas and Components of SIMATIC TOP connect a2 8 2 Terminal Assignments for Wiring the Terminal Block 8 3 Wiring Rules for the Terminal Block and the Front Connector 8 4 Screw Type Connections or Spring Loaded Connections 8 5 Preparing the Connecting Cables 8 6 Wiring the Front Connector and the Terminal Block 8 7 Wiring Digital Modules with SIMATIC TOP connect 8 15 Application When using SIMATIC TOP connect you wire actuators and sensors locally to one or more terminal blocks A connecting cable round sheath ribbon cable establishes the connection to the digital module S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 8 1 SIMATIC TOP connect Advantages Wiring the digital modules using SIMATIC TOP connect has the following advantages e Easy plug on connection of front connector module connecting cable and terminal e Fast low cost wiring the use of central terminal blocks is no longer necessary e The power supply for the digital module can be wired either to the front connector or to the terminal block e Multiple terminals for M and L connection e Wiring errors are drastically reduced and the cabinet wiring is clearly arranged e Each component can be replaced separately e Cable length can be configured with
323. tput module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A for high speed counters S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 74 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 21 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital input output module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A on the following page 1 1L O ago O 2 O 0 _ 4 yg o 1 Ee o 3 e L O 2 M o re o 3 a o gt a f 4 o bis o 5 TA S eoi 8 ol SRE Pe a 7 T a al 10 1M s l 24V 11 2L d a o HC A 12 1 n BAT S ae za eee 24V 2 3 o0 AS is oS ao of 4 aag 8 ee a eo 5 Backplane bus A EE E D q 18 o 6 interface Pee al ee o 7 its 3 20 2MU Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 21 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Output Module SM 323 DI 8 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4
324. transducers and sensors to your analog input modules e Voltage sensors e Current sensors as 2 wire transducers 4 wire transducers e Resistors This chapter tells you how to connect up your sensors and transducers and what precautions you have to take when doing so Cables for Analog Signals To reduce electrical interference you should use twisted pair shielded cables for the analog signals The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at both cable ends If there are potential differences between the cable ends an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield which leads to an interference of the analog signals In such a case you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only Isolated Analog Input Modules With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and the M terminal of the CPU You must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference Ujgo can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit Mana and the M terminal of the CPU Make sure that Ujgo does not exceed the permissible value If it is possible that the permissible value is exceeded establish a connection between the Mana terminal and the M terminal of the CPU Non Isolated Analog Input Modules With the non isolated analog input modules you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit Ma
325. tuator Close circuit Channel not used open Deactivate channel group output type parameter Reading Out Diagnostics Messages If you set diagnostics for analog modules you can read out the detailed diagnostics messages with STEP 7 see STEP 7 User Manual Diagnostics of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 You cannot program diagnostics messages for the analog input output module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit 4 54 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 3 6 Analog Module Interrupts Introduction In this Section the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described The following interrupts exist e Diagnostics interrupt e Process interrupt Configuring Interrupts Use STEP 7 to configure the interrupts Default Setting The default setting for interrupts is disabled Diagnostics Interrupt If an error for example wire break is detected or eliminated the module triggers a diagnostics interrupt provided the interrupt is enabled The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of priority classes with low priority and processes the diagnostics interrupt block OB 82 Process Interrupt Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value If the process signal for example temperature leaves this working range the module triggers a process interrupt provided the in
326. ture deviates from the compensating temperature the temperature sensitive bridge resistance changes This results in a positive or negative compensating voltage which is added to the thermo e m f Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 C 32 F for analog input modules Please note the following e The compensating box must have an isolated supply e The power supply must have adequate filtering for example by means of a grounded shielding winding Internal Compensation Bei der internen Kompensation k nnen Sie die Vergleichstelle an den Klemmen der Analogeingabebaugruppe bilden In diesem Fall m ssen Sie die Ausgleichsleitungen bis zur Analogbaugruppe f hren Der interne Temperatursensor erfaBt die Temperatur der Baugruppe und liefert eine Kompensationsspannung Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 27 Analog Modules Using Thermocouples If you wish to connect thermocouples you must observe the following You can use internal or external compensation depending on where you want the reference junction to be If you employ internal compensation the internal temperature of the module is used for comparison purposes If you employ external compensation the temperature of the reference junction of the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box
327. ucer There are two ways to use the channels a Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel group If diagnostics is enabled the analog module triggers a diagnostics interrupt once and the group fault LED of the analog module flashes b Connect a 1 5 to 3 3 kQ resistance to the unused input You may then enable diagnostics for this channel group e Current measurement 4 to 20 mA 4 wire transducer Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group Special Feature of De Activated Input Channels If you de activate all input channels and enable diagnostics when parameterizing the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit the analog input module does not indicate that the external auxiliary voltage is missing S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 65 Analog Modules Measuring Range Modules Some of the parameters of the analog input module SM 331 Al 8 x 12 Bit can be assigned directly on the module with measuring range modules The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions A B C and D They are set to the B position in the factory Tables 4 30 to 4 33 in Section tell you which setting you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range The settings for the various measuring ranges are also printed on the module Default Settings for Measurin
328. uit is overloaded e gt 2 6 A dynamic Voltage dip autom volt recovery Flashes e 2A lt I lt 2 6A steady state ae drop shortening of service ife the output is short circuited Output voltage 0 V automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been Dark eliminated S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 2 4 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Power Supply Modules Table 2 1 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module 2 A to Atypical Operating Conditions If Then 24 VDC LED an overvoltage occurs on the primary Possible destruction gt side there is an undervoltage on the Automatic disconnection Dark primary side automatic voltage recovery Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the PS 307 power supply module 2 A are listed below Dimensions and Weight Output Rating continued Output current e Rated value 2A cannot be connected in parallel configurations LED for output voltage available Dimensions 50 x 125 x 120mm Short circuit protection Electronic WxHxD 1 95 x 4 88 x 4 68 in nonlatching Weight approx 420 g 1 1 to 1 3 x In 14 7 oz Residual ripple max 150 mVss Input Rating Other Parameters Input voltage Protection class to IEC 536 with protective e Rated value 120 230 VAC DIN VDE 0106 Part 1 grounding conductor System frequency Insulation Rated value 50 Hz or 60 Hz e Rat
329. ule Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Analog Modules 4 9 1 Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit Parameter Assignment The functions of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit are set e with STEP 7 see the STEP 7 User Manual or e inthe user program by means of SFCs see the STEP 7 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 X 16 Bit is in operation intermediate values may appear at the out put You can configure each output channel of the SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit individually Advantage you can assign individual parameters for each output channel When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program the parameters are assigned to channel groups Each output channel of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit is then assigned to one channel group i e output channel 0 channel group 0 Default Setting The default settings of the module are diagnostic interrupt disabled group diagnostics disabled output type voltage output range 10 V and reaction to CPU STOP outputs without voltage or current You can use this output type with this output range without changing the parameters of the SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit with STEP 7 Unused Output Channels Unused output channels of the analog output module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit should be deactivated by using the Output parameter block when programmi
330. upt 3 43 Parameters incorrect SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts 3 16 6 Parameter assignment analog oytput module SM 332 AO 4 4 94 an 321 l DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 42 PARM_MOD SFC 57 Power supply module 2 1 dimension drawing Process interrupt analog module digital input module Process interrupt enable digital input module Process interrupt lost SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupt 8 17 SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Index 6 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Index Process interrupt 3 17 SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts 3 13 Process interrupt enable SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts 3 13 PS 307 dimension drawing C 9 Pulse shaped interference R Radio interference emission of 1 5 Rail for the Insert and Remove function dimension drawing Rails dimension drawing RAM error SM 321 DI 16 x 24VDC with process and diagnostics interrupts SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt Rated voltage 1 11 Reference junction for thermocouple 4 27 Relay output module 3 59 Repeater See RS 485 repeater Reset time analog input module Resistance measurement analog input module SM 331 Al 2
331. upts SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt Digital output channel diagnostics byte B 6 Diagnostics byte analog output channel analog input channel digital output channel B 6 digital input channel Diagnostics data Diagnostics analog input module analog output module A 11 digital input module digital output module system Diagnostics buffer Diagnostics entry 4 59 Diagnostics interrupt analog module Diagnostics interrupt enable analog input module analog output module digital input module digital output module Digital input module diagnostics diagnostics interrupt enable A 3 input delay process interrupt A 3 process interrupt enable A 3 Digital input modules parameters Digital input output module 3 70 Digital module dimension drawing C 17 Digital modules 3 1 Digital output module See also SM 322 diagnostics diagnostics interrupt enable hold last value parameters substitute value substitute value enable Digital input channel diagnostics byte B 6 Dimension drawings analog module digital module IM 360 IM 365 interface module power supply module PS 307 C 9 PS 307 PS 207 C RS 485 repeater C 20 shield connecting element C 18 signal module C 17 SIMATIC TOP connect C 19 Wire break SM 322 DO 8 x 24VDC with diagnostics interrupt 3 43 3 45 Wire break check analog output module
332. uring Ranges Tables 4 38 to 4 41 list the measuring ranges you can use with the analog input module Use STEP 7 and the measuring range modules on the analog input module to select the desired measuring ranges see Section Tables to 4 41 also show the necessary settings of the measuring range module Wire Break Check With the measuring range 4 to 20 mA and e activated wire break check the analog input module enters a wire break in the diagnostics if the current value falls below 3 6 mA If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration the analog input module additionally triggers a diagnostics interrupt If no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled the illuminated SF display is the only indicator for the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostics bytes in the user program e non activated wire break check the analog input module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when the underflow has been reached S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 87 Analog Modules Measuring Ranges for Voltage Measurements Table 4 38 shows all of the measuring ranges or the sensor type for voltage measurements as well as the relevant measuring range module settings Table 4 38 Measuring Ranges for Voltage Measurement external compensation thermovoltage measurement You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4 1 2 Table 4 4 in the voltage mea
333. urrent measurements are made by paralleling a channel s voltage input terminals with its respective current sense resistor This is accomplished by jumpering the channels input terminals to the adjacent terminals on the field connector For example to configure channel 0 for current mode you must jumper terminal 22 to 2 and terminal 23 to 3 The channel being configured for current measurements must be paired with the sense resistor connected to the channel s adjacent terminals in order to achieve the specified accuracy High Speed Update Mode The high speed update mode is only available when two channels are enabled on channel group 0 or 1 The module enters the high speed update mode if either channel group 0 or channel group 1 not both is enabled In the high speed update mode updates for the two channels in the group occur three times faster than with multiple channel groups enabled For example if channels 0 and 1 are enabled with 2 5 ms filtering data updates for both channels will be available to the PLC every 10 msec For other filter settings the filter setting equals the update rate Special Feature of Process Interrupts You can set process interrupts in STEP 7 for the first and second channel group Note that a process interrupt is set only for the first channel of the channel group that is for channel 0 or channel 2 respectively S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 0
334. utput Module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit 00 4 9 1 Starting Up the Analog Output Module SM 332 AO 4 x 16 Bit 4 9 2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332 PO A616 Bilecen a e EEE E se atten ail aa e ee ea aa oes 4 108 4 10 Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit 4 109 4 10 1 Characteristic Features and Technical Specifications of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit 4 109 4 10 2 Starting Up the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 X 8 8 Bit 222828 ou ie sald te A odd Heid dee eee ELIAS 4 113 4 10 3 Measurement Method and Type of Output of the Analog Input Output Module SM 334 Al 4 AO 2 x 8 8 Bit 0 eee ee eee 4 11 Analog Input Output Module SM334 Al 4 AO 2 x 12 Bit 4 11 1 Starting Up the SM 334 oseane 4 11 2 Analog Value Representation 0 eee ATIS Parameters vecowdeuctadeavandeteued GaN bdead ad AME evaded E vs 5 Other Signal Modules 5 1 Simulator Module SM 374 IN OUT 16 0 0 c cee eee eee 5 2 Dummy Module DM 370 siere 0 cece eee 5 3 SM 338 POS Input Module 0 cece 5 3 1 Connection Diagram 0 0 c ete 5 3 2 How the SM 338 Works 0000 eens 5 3 3 Freeze FUNCION 2 6 cece cece cent hee eo ee eae Gh ikea ee eee 5 3 4 Parameterization 2 0 ccc ccc ttt teens 5 3 5 Data Handing 2 60 0 ee cenneged vee gee egw Pew bag he vale goede ee ES 5 3 6 Diagno
335. uts Measured value resolution of 12 bits sign Type of measurement selectable Voltage Resistance Temperature Isolated from CPU Isolated from load voltage Note Below the rated load voltage range incorrect intermediate values occur at the output when the rated load voltage supply is switched on off S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 4 115 Analog Modules Terminal Connection Diagram Figure 4 29 shows the module view and the block diagram for the SM 334 You will find the detailed technical specifications of the SM 334 on the following pages Voltage input Resistance measurement e l L pay o N E Current Ico1 CHO o S source 3 Mo z Internal ce 4 id Mo supply Multiplexer a M CH1 6 i M 5 mal eae z Mana e i L d a Logic 5 C23 ang Mo CH2 o O back 10 M 2 plane AH o 2 bus in y terface o a M M o 12 Ma P qs 13 Ma CH3 z U OF M Ma 15 l i 2 MANA 1023 HE n CHO 17 M o Mana 5 a o V1 19 V M CH1 Mana ET ANA 2 M V
336. ves contactors motor starters fractional h p motors and indicator lights Note When the power supply is switched off the capacitor still stores energy for about 200 ms The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user program 7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 62 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 18 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the module SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 8 x 230 VAC REL on the following page o kK o 1 G 0 PE o 4 di L y Fe o ae yt 2 2 O a 3 M o2 Backplane bus 24V interface Hi 4 E U amem o 2 o 4 bg ol O o 5 o L o gt aie Y eat z M m 0O Ja z cae o s l 20 M Channel number Status LEDs green Figure 3 18 Module View and Block Diagram of Relay Output Module SM 3
337. ves contactors motor starters fractional h p motors and indicator lights S7 300 and M7 300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications 3 50 EWA 4NEB 710 6067 02 01 Digital Modules Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram Figure 3 14 shows the terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC 1 A You will find the detailed technical specifications of the module SM 322 DO 16 x 120 VAC 1 A on the following page 1144 o SF 5V 14 ay iG srps Jeg o 1 M een o D Wh gt TIN EE ASA x AR 5 a 3 P 7 ee Q o 4 M fe 0 o 5 Do ra o ma a 6 Backplane bus T Pome es D q interface 9 7 eet 2 10 N o O A 5V SA E beg I Li SF Pp 12 o 0 t 2 D q A 4 M B as ed o e ej 2 yal Y ay a al de ae fs O r gt EER E M welt ox z il ae D Vd F ayh 19 7 o 1 0 20 N o O Channel number ___ Statu
338. ws 1 4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7 300S 0 0 cece eee 1 5 Information on Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of ProtectiON oser sSie s oni Race ek eee ERAS SORES eee Poe edhe Pd 1 6 Rated Voltages of the S7 300 0 ete nee 1 7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules 0 00 cece eee eee 2 Power Supply Modules 2 1 The PS 307 Power Supply Module 2A 00 00 e eee eee eee 2 2 The PS 307 Power Supply Module 5A 0 000 e eee eee eee 2 3 The PS 307 Power Supply Module 10 A 00 c cee eee eee 3 Digital Modules 3 1 Digital Input Modules ccc eens 3 1 1 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 32 x 24 VDC 22205 3 1 2 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC 00 3 1 3 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC with Process and Diagnostics Interrupts 0 teens 3 1 4 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 24 VDC Source Input 3 1 5 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 16 x 120 VAC 220005 3 1 6 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 8 x 120 230 VAC 008 7 Digital Input Module SM 321 DI 32 x 120 VAC 2200045 3 2 Digital Output Modules 00 eens 3 2 1 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 32 x 24 VDC 0 5A 3 2 2 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 16 x 24VDC 0 5A 3 2 3 Digital Output Module SM 322 DO 8 x 24 VDC 0 5 A with Diagnostics Interrupt
339. x 220 g 7 7 oz Module Specific Data Number of outputs Length of cable shielded 4 max 200 m 218 yd Voltages Currents and Potentials Rated load voltage L e Reverse Polarity protection Galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus between channels and load voltage L between output channel to channel e backplane bus and L Permissible potential difference e channel to backplane e channel to L M e between channels e backplane to L M Isolation tested with e channel to backplane e channel to L M e between channels e backplane to L M Current drawn e from backplane bus e from load voltage L without load Power losses of the module 24 VDC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 200 VDC 120 VAC 200 VDC 120 VAC 200 VDC 120 VAC 200 VDC 120 VAC 1500 VAC 1500 VAC 1500 VAC 1500 VAC max 60 mA max 240 mA typ 3 W Resolution incl Overrange e 1to5V e 4to20mA Conversion time 1 to 4 channels Settling time e for resistive load e for capacitive load e for inductive load Substitute values 15 bits sign 13 bits 14 bits max 1 5 ms 0 2 ms 1 0 ms 0 2 ms Yes configurable Noise Suppression and Error Limits Crosstalk between outputs Operational limit over entire temperature range referred to output range e Voltage outputs e Current outputs Basic error operational limit at 25 C

modules in an S7-300

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents